Relion® 650 series

Bay control REC650

Technical manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 511 287-UEN
Issued: October 2016
Revision: A
Product version: 1.3

© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
http://www.abb.com/protection-control
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure
would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to
personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that
all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................29
This manual...................................................................................... 29
Intended audience............................................................................ 29
Product documentation.....................................................................30
Product documentation set..........................................................30
Document revision history........................................................... 31
Related documents......................................................................31
Symbols and conventions.................................................................32
Symbols.......................................................................................32
Document conventions................................................................ 33

Section 2 Available functions......................................................... 35

Control and monitoring functions......................................................35
Back-up protection functions............................................................ 39
Station communication..................................................................... 40
Basic IED functions.......................................................................... 41

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................43

Introduction.......................................................................................43
Operation principle........................................................................... 43
Presumptions for technical data....................................................... 44
Settings.............................................................................................45

Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................51

Binary input.......................................................................................51
Binary input debounce filter......................................................... 51
Oscillation filter............................................................................ 51
Settings........................................................................................52
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................52
Setting parameters for communication module......................53

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI...........................57

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................57
Identification................................................................................ 57
Settings........................................................................................57
Local HMI signals............................................................................. 57
Identification................................................................................ 57
Function block............................................................................. 57
Signals.........................................................................................58
Basic part for LED indication module............................................... 58

1
Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification................................................................................ 58
Function block............................................................................. 58
Signals.........................................................................................59
Settings........................................................................................60
LCD part for HMI function keys control module................................60
Identification................................................................................ 60
Function block............................................................................. 60
Signals.........................................................................................61
Settings........................................................................................61
Operation principle........................................................................... 62
Local HMI.................................................................................... 62
Display....................................................................................62
LEDs.......................................................................................65
Keypad................................................................................... 65
LED..............................................................................................66
Functionality........................................................................... 66
Status LEDs........................................................................... 67
Indication LEDs...................................................................... 67
Function keys.............................................................................. 75
Functionality........................................................................... 75
Operation principle................................................................. 75

Section 6 Current protection...........................................................79

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC ...........................................................................................79
Identification ............................................................................... 79
Functionality................................................................................ 79
Function block............................................................................. 79
Signals.........................................................................................79
Settings........................................................................................80
Monitored data.............................................................................80
Operation principle...................................................................... 80
Technical data............................................................................. 80
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC ....................................................................................... 81
Identification ............................................................................... 81
Functionality................................................................................ 81
Function block............................................................................. 82
Signals.........................................................................................82
Settings........................................................................................83
Monitored data.............................................................................85
Operation principle...................................................................... 85
Second harmonic blocking element.............................................89
Technical data............................................................................. 90

2
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC .................. 90

Identification ............................................................................... 90
Functionality................................................................................ 91
Function block............................................................................. 91
Signals.........................................................................................91
Settings........................................................................................91
Monitored data.............................................................................92
Operation principle...................................................................... 92
Technical data............................................................................. 92
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative
sequence direction EF4PTOC .........................................................92
Identification ............................................................................... 93
Functionality................................................................................ 93
Function block............................................................................. 94
Signals.........................................................................................94
Settings........................................................................................95
Monitored data.............................................................................98
Operation principle...................................................................... 98
Operating quantity within the function.................................... 98
Internal polarizing................................................................... 99
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................102
Base quantities within the protection....................................102
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................ 102
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................103
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................104
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................108
Technical data........................................................................... 109
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE ..................................................................................... 110
Identification.............................................................................. 110
Functionality.............................................................................. 110
Function block........................................................................... 111
Signals.......................................................................................111
Settings......................................................................................112
Monitored data...........................................................................113
Operation principle ................................................................... 113
Function inputs..................................................................... 113
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ.114
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3U0
· cos φ...................................................................................116
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ 117
Directional functions............................................................. 118
Non-directional earth fault current protection....................... 118

3
Technical manual
Table of contents

Residual overvoltage release and protection....................... 118

Technical data........................................................................... 120
Thermal overload protection, one time constant Celsius/
Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................121
Identification ............................................................................. 121
Functionality.............................................................................. 121
Function block........................................................................... 122
Signals.......................................................................................122
Settings......................................................................................123
Monitored data...........................................................................125
Operation principle.................................................................... 125
Technical data........................................................................... 128
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF 128
Identification.............................................................................. 128
Functionality.............................................................................. 128
Function block........................................................................... 129
Signals.......................................................................................129
Settings......................................................................................130
Monitored data...........................................................................130
Operation principle.................................................................... 131
Technical data........................................................................... 133
Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................ 134
Identification ............................................................................. 134
Functionality.............................................................................. 134
Function block........................................................................... 134
Signals.......................................................................................135
Settings......................................................................................135
Monitored data...........................................................................135
Operation principle.................................................................... 135
Technical data........................................................................... 136
Pole discordance protection CCRPLD .......................................... 136
Identification ............................................................................. 137
Functionality.............................................................................. 137
Function block........................................................................... 137
Signals.......................................................................................137
Settings......................................................................................138
Monitored data...........................................................................138
Operation principle.................................................................... 138
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................140
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................140
Technical data........................................................................... 141
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ............................................. 141
Identification.............................................................................. 141

4
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Functionality.............................................................................. 141
Function block........................................................................... 141
Signals.......................................................................................141
Settings......................................................................................142
Monitored data...........................................................................142
Operation principle.................................................................... 142
Technical data........................................................................... 144
Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP. 144
Functionality.............................................................................. 144
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ...........................144
Identification......................................................................... 144
Function block...................................................................... 145
Signals..................................................................................145
Settings................................................................................ 146
Monitored data..................................................................... 147
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP.......................... 147
Identification......................................................................... 147
Function block...................................................................... 147
Signals..................................................................................148
Settings................................................................................ 148
Monitored data..................................................................... 149
Operation principle.................................................................... 149
Low pass filtering..................................................................151
Technical data........................................................................... 152
Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC ..........152
Identification.............................................................................. 152
Functionality.............................................................................. 153
Function block........................................................................... 153
Signals.......................................................................................153
Settings......................................................................................154
Monitored data...........................................................................155
Operation principle.................................................................... 155
Technical data........................................................................... 156

Section 7 Voltage protection........................................................ 157

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................157
Identification.............................................................................. 157
Functionality.............................................................................. 157
Function block........................................................................... 157
Signals.......................................................................................158
Settings......................................................................................158
Monitored data...........................................................................159
Operation principle.................................................................... 159
Measurement principle......................................................... 160

5
Technical manual
Table of contents

Time delay............................................................................160
Blocking................................................................................161
Design.................................................................................. 161
Technical data........................................................................... 162
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................163
Identification.............................................................................. 163
Functionality.............................................................................. 163
Function block........................................................................... 164
Signals.......................................................................................164
Settings......................................................................................165
Monitored data...........................................................................165
Operation principle.................................................................... 166
Measurement principle......................................................... 166
Time delay............................................................................167
Blocking................................................................................168
Design.................................................................................. 168
Technical data........................................................................... 170
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ................. 170
Identification.............................................................................. 170
Functionality.............................................................................. 170
Function block........................................................................... 171
Signals.......................................................................................171
Settings......................................................................................171
Monitored data...........................................................................172
Operation principle.................................................................... 172
Measurement principle......................................................... 173
Time delay............................................................................173
Blocking................................................................................173
Design.................................................................................. 173
Technical data........................................................................... 175
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV .................................................. 175
Identification.............................................................................. 175
Functionality.............................................................................. 175
Function block........................................................................... 176
Signals.......................................................................................176
Settings......................................................................................176
Operation principle.................................................................... 177
Technical data........................................................................... 178

Section 8 Frequency protection....................................................179

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF ............................................. 179
Identification.............................................................................. 179
Functionality.............................................................................. 179
Function block........................................................................... 179

6
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................180
Settings......................................................................................180
Monitored data...........................................................................180
Operation principle.................................................................... 180
Measurement principle......................................................... 181
Time delay............................................................................181
Blocking................................................................................182
Design.................................................................................. 182
Technical data........................................................................... 182
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................182
Identification.............................................................................. 183
Functionality.............................................................................. 183
Function block........................................................................... 183
Signals.......................................................................................183
Settings......................................................................................184
Monitored data...........................................................................184
Operation principle.................................................................... 184
Measurement principle......................................................... 184
Time delay............................................................................185
Blocking................................................................................185
Design.................................................................................. 185
Technical data........................................................................... 186
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................186
Identification.............................................................................. 187
Functionality.............................................................................. 187
Function block........................................................................... 187
Signals.......................................................................................187
Settings......................................................................................188
Operation principle.................................................................... 188
Measurement principle......................................................... 188
Time delay............................................................................188
Design.................................................................................. 189
Technical data........................................................................... 190

Section 9 Secondary system supervision.....................................191

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF ............................................ 191
Identification.............................................................................. 191
Functionality.............................................................................. 191
Function block........................................................................... 191
Signals.......................................................................................192
Settings......................................................................................192
Operation principle.................................................................... 192
Technical data........................................................................... 194
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF............................................... 194

7
Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification.............................................................................. 194
Functionality.............................................................................. 195
Function block........................................................................... 195
Signals.......................................................................................196
Settings......................................................................................196
Monitored data...........................................................................197
Operation principle.................................................................... 197
Zero and negative sequence detection................................ 197
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................199
Dead line detection...............................................................201
Main logic............................................................................. 201
Technical data........................................................................... 205
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR............................. 205
Identification.............................................................................. 205
Functionality.............................................................................. 205
Function block........................................................................... 205
Signals.......................................................................................206
Settings......................................................................................206
Operation principle.................................................................... 206
Technical data........................................................................... 207

Section 10 Control..........................................................................209
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN...209
Identification.............................................................................. 209
Functionality.............................................................................. 209
Function block........................................................................... 210
Signals.......................................................................................210
Settings......................................................................................212
Monitored data...........................................................................214
Operation principle.................................................................... 215
Basic functionality.................................................................215
Synchrocheck.......................................................................215
Synchronizing.......................................................................217
Energizing check.................................................................. 218
Fuse failure supervision....................................................... 219
Voltage selection.................................................................. 219
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double
busbars.................................................................................220
Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement....221
Technical data........................................................................... 225
Autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC ............................ 225
Identification.............................................................................. 226
Functionality.............................................................................. 226
Function block........................................................................... 226

8
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................227
Settings......................................................................................228
Operation principle.................................................................... 229
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle..................................................................................... 229
Control of the auto-reclosing open time............................... 231
Long trip signal..................................................................... 231
Technical data........................................................................... 235
Apparatus control........................................................................... 236
Functionality.............................................................................. 236
Switch controller SCSWI........................................................... 236
Identification ........................................................................ 236
Functionality......................................................................... 236
Function block...................................................................... 237
Signals..................................................................................237
Settings................................................................................ 238
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................238
Identification ........................................................................ 238
Functionality......................................................................... 238
Function block...................................................................... 239
Signals..................................................................................239
Settings................................................................................ 240
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................240
Identification ........................................................................ 240
Functionality......................................................................... 240
Function block...................................................................... 241
Signals..................................................................................241
Settings................................................................................ 242
Bay control QCBAY................................................................... 242
Identification ........................................................................ 242
Functionality......................................................................... 242
Function block...................................................................... 243
Signals..................................................................................243
Settings................................................................................ 243
Local remote LOCREM............................................................. 244
Identification ........................................................................ 244
Functionality......................................................................... 244
Function block...................................................................... 244
Signals..................................................................................244
Settings................................................................................ 245
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL........................................ 245
Identification ........................................................................ 245
Functionality......................................................................... 245

9
Technical manual
Table of contents

Function block...................................................................... 245

Signals..................................................................................246
Settings................................................................................ 246
Select release SELGGIO...........................................................247
Identification......................................................................... 247
Function block...................................................................... 247
Signals..................................................................................247
Settings................................................................................ 248
Operation principle.................................................................... 248
Switch controller SCSWI...................................................... 248
Circuit breaker SXCBR.........................................................252
Circuit switch SXSWI ...........................................................256
Bay control QCBAY..............................................................260
Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/
LOCREMCTRL.....................................................................262
Interlocking..................................................................................... 263
Functionality.............................................................................. 263
Logical node for interlocking SCILO ......................................... 263
Identification......................................................................... 264
Functionality......................................................................... 264
Function block...................................................................... 264
Logic diagram.......................................................................264
Signals..................................................................................265
Settings................................................................................ 265
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................265
Identification......................................................................... 265
Functionality......................................................................... 266
Function block...................................................................... 266
Logic diagram.......................................................................266
Signals..................................................................................266
Settings................................................................................ 267
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.......................... 267
Identification......................................................................... 267
Functionality......................................................................... 267
Function block...................................................................... 268
Logic diagram.......................................................................268
Signals..................................................................................269
Settings................................................................................ 271
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................ 271
Identification......................................................................... 271
Functionality......................................................................... 271
Function block...................................................................... 272
Logic diagram.......................................................................272

10
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................272
Settings................................................................................ 273
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................ 273
Identification......................................................................... 274
Functionality......................................................................... 274
Function block...................................................................... 275
Logic diagram.......................................................................275
Signals..................................................................................278
Settings................................................................................ 280
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ..................................................... 280
Identification......................................................................... 280
Functionality......................................................................... 281
Function block...................................................................... 282
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 284
Signals..................................................................................289
Settings................................................................................ 293
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ........................................... 293
Identification......................................................................... 293
Functionality......................................................................... 294
Function block...................................................................... 295
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 296
Signals..................................................................................299
Settings................................................................................ 302
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE .......................................... 302
Identification......................................................................... 302
Functionality......................................................................... 302
Function block...................................................................... 304
Logic diagram.......................................................................305
Signals..................................................................................310
Settings................................................................................ 312
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................ 312
Identification......................................................................... 313
Functionality......................................................................... 313
Function block...................................................................... 314
Logic diagram.......................................................................314
Signals..................................................................................316
Settings................................................................................ 317
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................318
Identification......................................................................... 318
Functionality......................................................................... 318
Function block...................................................................... 318
Logic diagram.......................................................................318
Signals..................................................................................319

11
Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 319
Operation principle.................................................................... 319
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGGIO..................................................................... 322
Identification.............................................................................. 322
Functionality.............................................................................. 322
Function block........................................................................... 323
Signals.......................................................................................323
Settings......................................................................................324
Monitored data...........................................................................325
Operation principle.................................................................... 325
Selector mini switch VSGGIO.........................................................325
Identification.............................................................................. 325
Functionality.............................................................................. 326
Function block........................................................................... 326
Signals.......................................................................................326
Settings......................................................................................327
Operation principle.................................................................... 327
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO............ 328
Identification.............................................................................. 328
Functionality.............................................................................. 328
Function block........................................................................... 328
Signals.......................................................................................328
Settings......................................................................................329
Operation principle.................................................................... 329
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO......................... 329
Identification.............................................................................. 329
Functionality.............................................................................. 329
Function block........................................................................... 329
Signals.......................................................................................330
Settings......................................................................................330
Operation principle.................................................................... 331
Automation bits AUTOBITS............................................................331
Identification.............................................................................. 331
Functionality.............................................................................. 331
Function block........................................................................... 332
Signals.......................................................................................332
Settings......................................................................................333
Operation principle.................................................................... 333
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD..................... 334
Functionality.............................................................................. 334
Function block........................................................................... 334
Signals.......................................................................................334

12
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................335
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD....................... 335
Functionality.............................................................................. 335
Function block........................................................................... 335
Signals.......................................................................................335
Settings......................................................................................336
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD.................................................................................336
Functionality.............................................................................. 336
Function block........................................................................... 336
Signals.......................................................................................336
Settings......................................................................................337
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.337
Functionality.............................................................................. 337
Function block........................................................................... 338
Signals.......................................................................................338
Settings......................................................................................338
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD.................................................................................338
Functionality.............................................................................. 338
Function block........................................................................... 339
Signals.......................................................................................339
Settings......................................................................................339

Section 11 Logic.............................................................................341
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC........................341
Identification.............................................................................. 341
Functionality.............................................................................. 341
Function block........................................................................... 341
Signals.......................................................................................342
Settings......................................................................................342
Operation principle.................................................................... 342
Technical data........................................................................... 343
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO............................................................ 343
Identification.............................................................................. 343
Functionality.............................................................................. 343
Function block........................................................................... 344
Signals.......................................................................................344
Settings......................................................................................345
Operation principle.................................................................... 346
Configurable logic blocks................................................................347
Standard configurable logic blocks............................................347
Functionality......................................................................... 347
OR function block................................................................. 349

13
Technical manual
Table of contents

Inverter function block INVERTER....................................... 350

PULSETIMER function block .............................................. 351
Controllable gate function block GATE................................ 352
Exclusive OR function block XOR........................................ 353
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY.............................. 354
Timer function block TIMERSET.......................................... 355
AND function block ..............................................................356
Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY....................357
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY........... 358
Configurable logic Q/T...............................................................360
Functionality......................................................................... 360
ORQT function block ........................................................... 360
INVERTERQT function block .............................................. 361
Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT..........................362
XORQT function block..........................................................363
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT........................ 364
ANDQT function block .........................................................365
Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT.............................366
Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT ...........................367
INVALIDQT function block................................................... 368
Indication combining single position function block
INDCOMBSPQT...................................................................370
Indication extractor single position function block
INDEXTSPQT...................................................................... 371
Technical data........................................................................... 373
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................374
Identification.............................................................................. 374
Functionality.............................................................................. 374
Function block........................................................................... 374
Signals.......................................................................................374
Settings......................................................................................375
Operation principle.................................................................... 375
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I...........................................375
Identification.............................................................................. 375
Functionality.............................................................................. 375
Function block........................................................................... 376
Signals.......................................................................................376
Settings......................................................................................377
Monitored data...........................................................................377
Operation principle.................................................................... 377
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation
B16IFCVI........................................................................................ 378
Identification.............................................................................. 378
Functionality.............................................................................. 378

14
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block........................................................................... 379

Signals.......................................................................................379
Settings......................................................................................380
Monitored data...........................................................................380
Operation principle.................................................................... 380
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................ 381
Identification.............................................................................. 381
Functionality.............................................................................. 381
Function block........................................................................... 381
Signals.......................................................................................382
Settings......................................................................................382
Operation principle.................................................................... 382
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
IB16FCVB.......................................................................................384
Identification.............................................................................. 384
Functionality.............................................................................. 384
Function block........................................................................... 384
Signals.......................................................................................384
Settings......................................................................................385
Operation principle.................................................................... 385
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGGIO..................................................................... 386
Identification.............................................................................. 386
Functionality.............................................................................. 387
Function block........................................................................... 387
Signals.......................................................................................387
Settings......................................................................................388
Operation principle.................................................................... 388
Operation Accuracy..............................................................389
Memory storage................................................................... 389
Technical data........................................................................... 390

Section 12 Monitoring.....................................................................391
Measurements................................................................................391
Functionality.............................................................................. 391
Measurements CVMMXN..........................................................392
Identification ........................................................................ 392
Function block...................................................................... 393
Signals..................................................................................393
Settings................................................................................ 394
Monitored data..................................................................... 397
Phase current measurement CMMXU.......................................397
Identification ........................................................................ 397
Function block...................................................................... 398

15
Technical manual
Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................398
Settings................................................................................ 398
Monitored data..................................................................... 399
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU........................... 400
Identification ........................................................................ 400
Function block...................................................................... 400
Signals..................................................................................400
Settings................................................................................ 401
Monitored data..................................................................... 401
Current sequence component measurement CMSQI............... 402
Identification ........................................................................ 402
Function block...................................................................... 402
Signals..................................................................................402
Settings................................................................................ 403
Monitored data..................................................................... 404
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI.................................. 404
Identification ........................................................................ 404
Function block...................................................................... 405
Signals..................................................................................405
Settings................................................................................ 406
Monitored data..................................................................... 407
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU........................407
Identification ........................................................................ 407
Function block...................................................................... 407
Signals..................................................................................408
Settings................................................................................ 408
Monitored data..................................................................... 409
Operation principle.................................................................... 409
Measurement supervision.................................................... 409
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................414
Phase current measurement CMMXU................................. 419
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU.............................................................. 420
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI..................................................................................420
Technical data........................................................................... 420
Event Counter CNTGGIO...............................................................421
Identification.............................................................................. 421
Functionality.............................................................................. 421
Function block........................................................................... 421
Signals.......................................................................................421
Settings......................................................................................422
Monitored data...........................................................................422
Operation principle.................................................................... 422

16
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Reporting..............................................................................423
Technical data........................................................................... 423
Function description....................................................................... 423
Limit counter L4UFCNT.............................................................423
Introduction................................................................................423
Principle of operation.................................................................424
Design.................................................................................. 424
Reporting..............................................................................425
Function block........................................................................... 425
Signals.......................................................................................426
Settings......................................................................................426
Monitored data...........................................................................427
Technical data........................................................................... 427
Disturbance report.......................................................................... 427
Functionality.............................................................................. 427
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.................................................. 428
Identification......................................................................... 428
Function block...................................................................... 428
Signals..................................................................................428
Settings................................................................................ 428
Monitored data..................................................................... 429
Analog input signals AxRADR................................................... 432
Identification......................................................................... 432
Function block...................................................................... 433
Signals..................................................................................433
Settings................................................................................ 434
Analog input signals A4RADR...................................................437
Identification......................................................................... 437
Function block...................................................................... 437
Signals..................................................................................438
Settings................................................................................ 438
Binary input signals BxRBDR.................................................... 442
Identification......................................................................... 442
Function block...................................................................... 442
Signals..................................................................................442
Settings................................................................................ 443
Operation principle.................................................................... 448
Disturbance information....................................................... 450
Indications ........................................................................... 450
Event recorder .....................................................................450
Event list ..............................................................................450
Trip value recorder .............................................................. 450
Disturbance recorder ...........................................................451

17
Technical manual
Table of contents

Time tagging.........................................................................451
Recording times................................................................... 451
Analog signals...................................................................... 452
Binary signals....................................................................... 453
Trigger signals......................................................................453
Post Retrigger...................................................................... 454
Technical data........................................................................... 455
Indications...................................................................................... 455
Functionality.............................................................................. 455
Function block........................................................................... 456
Signals.......................................................................................456
Input signals......................................................................... 456
Operation principle.................................................................... 456
Technical data........................................................................... 457
Event recorder ............................................................................... 457
Functionality.............................................................................. 457
Function block........................................................................... 457
Signals.......................................................................................457
Input signals......................................................................... 457
Operation principle.................................................................... 457
Technical data........................................................................... 458
Event list......................................................................................... 458
Functionality.............................................................................. 458
Function block........................................................................... 458
Signals.......................................................................................459
Input signals......................................................................... 459
Operation principle.................................................................... 459
Technical data........................................................................... 459
Trip value recorder......................................................................... 459
Functionality.............................................................................. 459
Function block........................................................................... 460
Signals.......................................................................................460
Input signals......................................................................... 460
Operation principle.................................................................... 460
Technical data........................................................................... 461
Disturbance recorder...................................................................... 461
Functionality.............................................................................. 461
Function block........................................................................... 461
Signals.......................................................................................461
Settings......................................................................................461
Operation principle.................................................................... 462
Memory and storage............................................................ 462
Technical data........................................................................... 464

18
Technical manual
 Table of contents

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO............ 464

Identification.............................................................................. 464
Functionality.............................................................................. 464
Function block........................................................................... 464
Signals.......................................................................................464
Settings......................................................................................465
Operation principle.................................................................... 465
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs
SP16GGIO..................................................................................... 465
Identification.............................................................................. 465
Functionality.............................................................................. 465
Function block........................................................................... 465
Signals.......................................................................................466
Settings......................................................................................466
MonitoredData........................................................................... 466
Operation principle.................................................................... 467
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO............467
Identification.............................................................................. 467
Functionality.............................................................................. 468
Function block........................................................................... 468
Signals.......................................................................................468
Settings......................................................................................468
Monitored data...........................................................................469
Operation principle.................................................................... 469
Measured value expander block MVEXP....................................... 469
Identification.............................................................................. 469
Functionality.............................................................................. 470
Function block........................................................................... 470
Signals.......................................................................................470
Settings......................................................................................470
Operation principle.................................................................... 471
Fault locator LMBRFLO..................................................................471
Identification.............................................................................. 471
Functionality.............................................................................. 471
Function block........................................................................... 472
Signals.......................................................................................472
Settings......................................................................................473
Monitored data...........................................................................474
Operation principle.................................................................... 474
Measuring Principle..............................................................475
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault..... 475
The non-compensated impedance model............................ 479
Technical data........................................................................... 480

19
Technical manual
Table of contents

Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT......................................... 480

Identification.............................................................................. 480
Function block........................................................................... 480
Functionality.............................................................................. 480
Signals.......................................................................................481
Settings......................................................................................481
Measured values....................................................................... 481
Monitored Data.......................................................................... 482
Operation principle ................................................................... 482
Technical data........................................................................... 483
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG..................................... 483
Identification.............................................................................. 483
Functionality.............................................................................. 483
Function block........................................................................... 484
Signals.......................................................................................484
Settings......................................................................................485
Operation principle.................................................................... 485
Technical data........................................................................... 485
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML....................................486
Identification.............................................................................. 486
Functionality.............................................................................. 486
Function block........................................................................... 486
Signals.......................................................................................486
Settings......................................................................................487
Operation principle.................................................................... 487
Technical data........................................................................... 488
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR..................................488
Identification.............................................................................. 488
Functionality.............................................................................. 488
Function block........................................................................... 489
Signals.......................................................................................489
Settings......................................................................................490
Monitored data...........................................................................491
Operation principle.................................................................... 491
Circuit breaker status........................................................... 493
Circuit breaker operation monitoring.................................... 493
Breaker contact travel time...................................................494
Operation counter.................................................................495
Accumulation of Iyt................................................................496
Remaining life of the circuit breaker..................................... 498
Circuit breaker spring charged indication............................. 499
Gas pressure supervision.....................................................500
Technical data........................................................................... 501

20
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS................................ 501

Functionality.............................................................................. 501
Function block........................................................................... 502
Signals.......................................................................................503
Settings......................................................................................503
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR...............................................................................504
Functionality.............................................................................. 504
Function block........................................................................... 504
Signals.......................................................................................504
Settings......................................................................................505
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR...........505
Functionality.............................................................................. 505
Function block........................................................................... 505
Signals.......................................................................................506
Settings......................................................................................506
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF................506
Functionality.............................................................................. 506
Function block........................................................................... 506
Signals.......................................................................................506
Settings......................................................................................507
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT................................................................................ 507
Functionality.............................................................................. 507
Function block........................................................................... 508
Signals.......................................................................................508
Settings......................................................................................509
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED....................................... 509
Functionality.............................................................................. 509
Function block........................................................................... 510
Signals.......................................................................................510
Settings......................................................................................510
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV...................510
Functionality.............................................................................. 510
Function block........................................................................... 511
Signals.......................................................................................511
Settings......................................................................................511
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF511
Functionality.............................................................................. 511
Function block........................................................................... 512
Signals.......................................................................................512
Settings......................................................................................513

Section 13 Metering....................................................................... 515

21
Technical manual
Table of contents

Pulse counter PCGGIO.................................................................. 515

Identification.............................................................................. 515
Functionality.............................................................................. 515
Function block........................................................................... 515
Signals.......................................................................................515
Settings......................................................................................516
Monitored data...........................................................................516
Operation principle.................................................................... 516
Technical data........................................................................... 518
Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR....................518
Identification.............................................................................. 518
Functionality.............................................................................. 518
Function block........................................................................... 519
Signals.......................................................................................519
Settings......................................................................................520
Monitored data...........................................................................521
Operation principle.................................................................... 521
Technical data........................................................................... 522

Section 14 Station communication................................................. 523

DNP3 protocol................................................................................ 523
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol ........................................ 523
Identification.............................................................................. 523
Functionality.............................................................................. 523
Communication interfaces and protocols.................................. 524
Settings......................................................................................524
Technical data........................................................................... 525
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.................. 525
Identification.............................................................................. 525
Function block........................................................................... 526
Signals.......................................................................................526
Settings......................................................................................528
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................528
Identification.............................................................................. 528
Function block........................................................................... 529
Signals.......................................................................................529
Settings......................................................................................530
Operation principle.................................................................... 530
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV..............................................................................531
Identification.............................................................................. 531
Functionality.............................................................................. 531
Function block........................................................................... 531
Signals.......................................................................................531

22
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................532
Operation principle ................................................................... 532
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV............................................................................. 532
Identification.............................................................................. 532
Functionality.............................................................................. 533
Function block........................................................................... 533
Signals.......................................................................................533
Settings......................................................................................533
Operation principle ................................................................... 533
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV............................................................................. 534
Identification.............................................................................. 534
Functionality.............................................................................. 534
Function block........................................................................... 534
Signals.......................................................................................534
Settings......................................................................................535
Operation principle ................................................................... 535
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV.............................................................................. 535
Identification.............................................................................. 535
Functionality.............................................................................. 536
Function block........................................................................... 536
Signals.......................................................................................536
Settings......................................................................................536
Operation principle ................................................................... 536
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol..................................... 537
Functionality.............................................................................. 537
Settings......................................................................................538
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication................... 538
Functionality ............................................................................. 539
Principle of operation.................................................................539
Function block........................................................................... 540
Setting parameters.................................................................... 541
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG......................................... 541
Activity logging ACTIVLOG....................................................... 541
Settings......................................................................................541
Generic security application component AGSAL............................542
Generic security application AGSAL......................................... 542
Security events on protocols SECALARM......................................542
Security alarm SECALARM.......................................................542
Signals.......................................................................................542
Settings......................................................................................542

23
Technical manual
Table of contents

Section 15 Basic IED functions...................................................... 543

Self supervision with internal event list ..........................................543
Functionality.............................................................................. 543
Internal error signals INTERRSIG............................................. 543
Identification......................................................................... 543
Function block...................................................................... 543
Signals..................................................................................543
Settings................................................................................ 544
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST...........................................544
Identification......................................................................... 544
Settings................................................................................ 544
Operation principle.................................................................... 544
Internal signals..................................................................... 546
Run-time model.................................................................... 548
Technical data........................................................................... 549
Time synchronization......................................................................550
Functionality.............................................................................. 550
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN...................................550
Identification......................................................................... 550
Settings................................................................................ 550
Time synchronization via SNTP................................................ 550
Identification......................................................................... 550
Settings................................................................................ 551
Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN.......................... 551
Identification......................................................................... 551
Settings................................................................................ 551
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND...............................552
Identification......................................................................... 552
Settings................................................................................ 552
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE..............................................552
Identification......................................................................... 552
Settings................................................................................ 553
Time synchronization via IRIG-B............................................... 553
Identification......................................................................... 553
Settings................................................................................ 553
Operation principle.................................................................... 553
General concepts................................................................. 553
Real-time clock (RTC) operation.......................................... 555
Synchronization alternatives................................................ 556
Technical data........................................................................... 557
Parameter setting group handling.................................................. 557
Functionality.............................................................................. 557

24
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Setting group handling SETGRPS............................................ 557

Identification......................................................................... 557
Settings................................................................................ 558
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP........................................558
Identification......................................................................... 558
Function block...................................................................... 558
Signals..................................................................................558
Settings................................................................................ 559
Operation principle.................................................................... 559
Test mode functionality TESTMODE..............................................560
Identification.............................................................................. 560
Functionality.............................................................................. 560
Function block........................................................................... 561
Signals.......................................................................................561
Settings......................................................................................561
Operation principle.................................................................... 562
Change lock function CHNGLCK .................................................. 563
Identification.............................................................................. 563
Functionality.............................................................................. 563
Function block........................................................................... 563
Signals.......................................................................................563
Settings......................................................................................564
Operation principle.................................................................... 564
IED identifiers TERMINALID.......................................................... 564
Identification.............................................................................. 564
Functionality.............................................................................. 565
Settings......................................................................................565
Product information ....................................................................... 565
Identification.............................................................................. 565
Functionality.............................................................................. 565
Settings......................................................................................566
Primary system values PRIMVAL...................................................566
Identification.............................................................................. 566
Functionality.............................................................................. 566
Settings......................................................................................566
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI............................................. 566
Functionality.............................................................................. 566
Identification.............................................................................. 567
Function block........................................................................... 567
Signals.......................................................................................568
Settings......................................................................................569
Operation principle ................................................................... 571
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM.............................................. 575

25
Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification.............................................................................. 575
Functionality.............................................................................. 575
Function block........................................................................... 575
Signals.......................................................................................575
Settings......................................................................................576
Operation principle.................................................................... 576
Global base values GBASVAL....................................................... 576
Identification.............................................................................. 577
Functionality.............................................................................. 577
Settings......................................................................................577
Authority check ATHCHCK.............................................................577
Identification.............................................................................. 577
Functionality.............................................................................. 577
Settings......................................................................................578
Operation principle.................................................................... 578
Authorization handling in the IED......................................... 579
Authority management AUTHMAN.................................................580
Identification.............................................................................. 580
AUTHMAN.................................................................................580
Settings......................................................................................580
FTP access with password FTPACCS........................................... 581
Identification.............................................................................. 581
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS...............................................581
Settings......................................................................................581
Authority status ATHSTAT............................................................. 582
Identification.............................................................................. 582
Functionality.............................................................................. 582
Function block........................................................................... 582
Signals.......................................................................................582
Settings......................................................................................582
Operation principle.................................................................... 582
Denial of service............................................................................. 583
Functionality.............................................................................. 583
Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT...583
Identification......................................................................... 583
Function block...................................................................... 583
Signals..................................................................................583
Settings................................................................................ 584
Monitored data..................................................................... 584
Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1..584
Identification......................................................................... 584
Function block...................................................................... 585
Signals..................................................................................585

26
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 585
Monitored data..................................................................... 585
Operation principle.................................................................... 586

Section 16 IED physical connections............................................. 587

Protective earth connections.......................................................... 587
Inputs..............................................................................................587
Measuring inputs....................................................................... 587
Auxiliary supply voltage input.................................................... 588
Binary inputs..............................................................................589
Outputs........................................................................................... 592
Outputs for tripping, controlling and signalling...........................592
Outputs for signalling.................................................................594
IRF.............................................................................................597
Communication connections.......................................................... 597
Ethernet RJ-45 front connection................................................597
Station communication rear connection.................................... 598
Optical serial rear connection.................................................... 598
EIA-485 serial rear connection.................................................. 598
Communication interfaces and protocols.................................. 599
Recommended industrial Ethernet switches............................. 599
Connection diagrams......................................................................599

Section 17 Technical data.............................................................. 601

Dimensions.....................................................................................601
Power supply.................................................................................. 601
Energizing inputs............................................................................ 602
Binary inputs...................................................................................602
Signal outputs.................................................................................603
Power outputs.................................................................................603
Data communication interfaces...................................................... 604
Enclosure class.............................................................................. 605
Ingress protection........................................................................... 605
Environmental conditions and tests................................................606

Section 18 IED and functionality tests............................................607

Electromagnetic compatibility tests................................................ 607
Insulation tests................................................................................609
Mechanical tests.............................................................................609
Product safety.................................................................................609
EMC compliance............................................................................ 610

Section 19 Time inverse characteristics.........................................611

Application...................................................................................... 611
Operation principle......................................................................... 614

27
Technical manual
Table of contents

Mode of operation......................................................................614
Inverse time characteristics............................................................ 617

Section 20 Glossary....................................................................... 641

28
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.

29
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual

IEC07000220-3-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V3 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection
and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP 3.0.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking
of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as
well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of
testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the

30
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 1
Introduction

chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant

procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a
typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provides assistance for
calculating settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols

supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific
to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/March 2013 First release
A/October 2016 Minor corrections made

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to REC650 Identity number
Application manual 1MRK 511 286-UEN
Technical manual 1MRK 511 287-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 511 288-UEN
Product Guide 1MRK 511 289-BEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 511 289-TEN

650 series manuals Identity number

Communication protocol manual, DNP 3.0 1MRK 511 280-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850–8–1 1MRK 511 281-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 282-UEN
Table continues on next page

31
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Introduction

650 series manuals Identity number

Cyber Security deployment guidelines 1MRK 511 285-UEN
Point list manual, DNP 3.0 1MRK 511 283-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 284-UEN
Operation manual 1MRK 500 096-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 016-UEN
Accessories, 650 series 1MRK 513 023-BEN
MICS 1MRG 010 656
PICS 1MRG 010 660
PIXIT 1MRG 010 658

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of
a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

32
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 1
Introduction

1.4.2 Document conventions

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
must be connected to another function block in the application
configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.

33
Technical manual
34
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
REC650

3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and 0–1 1 1 1
synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser for 3–phase operation 0–1 1 1 1
SLGGIO Logic Rotating Switch for function selection 15 15 15 15
and LHMI presentation
VSGGIO Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20
DPGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 16 16 16 16
functions double point
SPC8GGIO Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for 3 3 3 3
DNP3.0
I103CMD Function commands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for 4 4 4 4
IEC60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for 50 50 50 50
IEC60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50 50 50 50
IEC60870-5-103
Apparatus control and Interlocking
APC8 Apparatus control for single bay, max 8 app. 1 1 1 1
(1CB) incl. interlocking
SCILO 3 Logical node for interlocking 8 8 8 8
BB_ES 3 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch 3 3 3 3
A1A2_BS 3 Interlocking for bus-section breaker 2 2 2 2
A1A2_DC 3 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector 3 3 3 3
ABC_BC 3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay 1 1 1 1
BH_CONN 3 Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter 1 1 1 1
BH_LINE_A 3 Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter 1 1 1 1
BH_LINE_B 3 Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter 1 1 1 1
Table continues on next page

35
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Available functions

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
REC650

3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
DB_BUS_A 3 Interlocking for double CB bay 1 1 1 1
DB_BUS_B 3 Interlocking for double CB bay 1 1 1 1
DB_LINE 3 Interlocking for double CB bay 1 1 1 1
ABC_LINE 3 Interlocking for line bay 1 1 1 1
AB_TRAFO 3 Interlocking for transformer bay 1 1 1 1
SCSWI Switch controller 8 8 8 8
SXCBR Circuit breaker 3 3 3 3
SXSWI Circuit switch 7 7 7 7
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 8 8 8 8
SELGGIO Select release 1 1 1 1
QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1 1 1 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of Permitted Source To Operate 1 1 1 1
(PSTO)
Secondary system supervision
CCSRDIF 87 Current circuit supervision 0–1 1 1 1
SDDRFUF Fuse failure supervision 0–1 1 1 1
TCSSCBR Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring 3 3 3 3
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic, common 3–phase output 1 1 1 1
TMAGGIO Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12
OR Configurable logic blocks 283 283 283 283
INVERTER Configurable logic blocks 140 140 140 140
PULSETIMER Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
GATE Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
XOR Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
LOOPDELAY Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
TIMERSET Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
AND Configurable logic blocks 280 280 280 280
SRMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
RSMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
Q/T Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–1
ANDQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–120 120 120 120
ORQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–120 120 120 120
INVERTERQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–120 120 120 120
XORQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
Table continues on next page

36
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
REC650

3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
SRMEMORYQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
RSMEMORYQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
TIMERSETQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
PULSETIMERQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
INVALIDQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–12 12 12 12
INDCOMBSPQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–20 20 20 20
INDEXTSPQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–20 20 20 20
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16 16 16 16
B16IFCVI Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic 16 16 16 16
node representation
IB16A Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16 16 16 16
IB16FCVB Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic 16 16 16 16
node representation
TEIGGIO Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12 12 12
transgression and overflow supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN Measurements 6 6 6 6
CMMXU Phase current measurement 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Phase-phase voltage measurement 6 6 6 6
CMSQI Current sequence component measurement 6 6 6 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6 6 6 6
VNMMXU Phase-neutral voltage measurement 6 6 6 6
AISVBAS Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of the analog inputs
TM_P_P2 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of primary analog inputs 600TRM
AM_P_P4 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of primary analog inputs 600AIM
TM_S_P2 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of secondary analog inputs 600TRM
AM_S_P4 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of secondary analog inputs 600AIM
CNTGGIO Event counter 5 5 5 5
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 12 12 12 12
DRPRDRE Disturbance report 1 1 1 1
AnRADR Analog input signals 4 4 4 4
BnRBDR Binary input signals 6 6 6 6
Table continues on next page

37
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Available functions

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
REC650

3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
SPGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 64 64 64 64
functions
SP16GGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 16 16 16 16
functions 16 inputs
MVGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 16 16 16 16
functions
MVEXP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66
LMBRFLO Fault locator 0–1 1 1
SPVNZBAT Station battery supervision 0–1 1 1 1
SSIMG 63 Insulation gas monitoring function 0–1 1 1 1
SSIML 71 Insulation liquid monitoring function 0–1 1 1 1
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0–1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for 3 3 3 3
IEC60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for 20 20 20 20
IEC60870-5-103
Metering
PCGGIO Pulse counter 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand 3 3 3 3
handling

38
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 2
Available functions

2.2 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay

Function name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
REC650

3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, 3– 0–1 1 1 1
phase output
OC4PTOC 51/67 Four step phase overcurrent protection, 3-phase 0–1 1 1 1
output
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0–1 1 1 1
EF4PTOC 51N/67N Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero/ 0–1 1 1 1
negative sequence direction
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and 0–1 1 1 1
power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0–1 1 1 1
Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0–1 1 1 1
Fahrenheit
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection, 3–phase activation and 0–1 1 1 1
output
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0–1 1 1 1
CCRPLD 52PD Pole discordance protection 0–1 1 1 1
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 0–1 1 1 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0–1 1 1 1
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0–1 1 1 1
DNSPTOC 46 Negative sequence based overcurrent function 0–1 1 1 1
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0–1 1 1 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0–1 1 1 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0–1 1 1 1
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0–1 1 1 1
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency function 0–2 2 2 2
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency function 0–2 2 2 2
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency protection 0–2 2 2 2

39
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Available functions

2.3 Station communication

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA
REC650

BCAB
Station communication
IEC61850-8-1 IEC 61850 communication protocol 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1
RS485DNP DNP3.0 for RS-485 communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH1TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH2TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH3TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH4TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
OPTICALDNP DNP3.0 for optical RS-232 communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MSTSERIAL DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MST2TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MST3TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MST4TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1
OPTICALPROT Operation selection for optical serial 1 1 1 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1
communication
RS485103 IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for 1 1 1 1
RS485
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59 59 59
interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 4 4 4 4
ETHFRNT Ethernet configuration of front port, LAN1 1 1 1 1
ETHLAN1 port and gateway
GATEWAY
Table continues on next page

40
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A01)

REC650 (A02)

REC650 (A07)
3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA
REC650

BCAB
ETHLAN1_AB Ethernet configuration of LAN1 port 1
PRPSTATUS System component for parallell 1
redundancy protocol
CONFPROT IED Configuration Protocol 1 1 1 1
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on 1 1 1 1
protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double 32 32 32 32
point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an 32 32 32 32
integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 16 16 16 16
measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single 64 64 64 64
point value

2.4 Basic IED functions

IEC 61850/Function Function description

block name
Basic functions included in all products
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list 1
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list 1
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization 1
SNTP Time synchronization 1
DTSBEGIN, DTSEND, Time synchronization, daylight saving 1
TIMEZONE
IRIG-B Time synchronization 1
SETGRPS Setting group handling 1
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups 1
TESTMODE Test mode functionality 1
CHNGLCK Change lock function 1
PRIMVAL Primary system values 1
SMAI_20_1 - Signal matrix for analog inputs 2
SMAI_20_12
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 12
GBASVAL Global base values for settings 6
Table continues on next page

41
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Available functions

IEC 61850/Function Function description

block name
ATHSTAT Authority status 1
ATHCHCK Authority check 1
AUTHMAN Authority management 1
FTPACCS FTPS access with password 1
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port 1
DOSLAN1 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1A and LAN1B ports 1
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control 1

42
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs

3.1 Introduction

Analog input channels in the IED must be set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in
the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms
in the IED use primary system quantities. Consequently the setting values are
expressed in primary quantities as well and therefore it is important to set the
transformation ratio of the connected current and voltage transformers properly.

The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters depends on the

ordered IED.

A reference PhaseAngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

3.2 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or
away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into
the object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out
from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure
2)

• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

43
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Analog inputs

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

3.3 Presumptions for technical data

The technical data stated in this document are only valid under the following
circumstances:

• CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main
instrument transformers. Note that for functions which measure an analogue
signal which do not have corresponding primary quantity, the 1:1 ratio shall be set
for the used analogue inputs on the IED, For example, HZPDIF.
• Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT primary
current.
• Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary
phase-to-phase voltage.
• Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal to sqrt(3)* IBase* UBase
for three-phase power system.

44
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 3
Analog inputs

3.4 Settings

Dependent on ordered IED type.

Table 1: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM - Channel 1 - - TRM - Channel 1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM - Channel 2 presentation
TRM - Channel 3
TRM - Channel 4
TRM - Channel 5
TRM - Channel 6
TRM - Channel 7
TRM - Channel 8
TRM - Channel 9
TRM - Channel 10
AIM - Channel 1
AIM - Channel 2
AIM - Channel 3
AIM - Channel 4
AIM - Channel 5
AIM - Channel 6
AIM - Channel 7
AIM - Channel 8
AIM - Channel 9
AIM - Channel 10

Table 2: TRM_6I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

45
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 3: TRM_8I_2U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

46
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 4: TRM_4I_1I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage

47
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Analog inputs

Table 5: TRM_4I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec5 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim5 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 6: AIM_6I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

48
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 7: AIM_4I_1I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

49
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage

50
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and
the debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 5 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0
again.

Each binary input has a filter time parameter DebounceTimex, where x is the number
of the binary input of the module in question (for example DebounceTime1).

The debounce time should be set to the same value for all channels on
the board.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. Floating input lines can result in
disturbances to binary inputs. These disturbances are unwanted in the system. An
oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a binary input
starts oscillating.

Each debounced input signal change increments of an oscillation counter. Every time
the oscillation time counter reaches the set OscillationTime, the oscillation counter is
checked and both the time counter and the oscillation counter are reset. If the counter
value is above the set OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating and
not valid. If the value is below the set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as
valid again. During counting of the oscillation time the status of the signal remains
unchanged, leading to a fixed delay in the status update, even if the signal has attained
normal status again.

51
Technical manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Binary input and output modules

Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCountx and an

oscillation time parameter OscillationTimex, where x is the number of the binary input
of the module in question.

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 8: BIO_9BI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 9: BIO_9BI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1
Threshold2 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 2
DebounceTime2 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 2
OscillationCount2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2
OscillationTime2 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 2
Threshold3 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 3
DebounceTime3 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 3
OscillationCount3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3
OscillationTime3 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 3
Threshold4 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 4
DebounceTime4 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 4
OscillationCount4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 4
OscillationTime4 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 4
Threshold5 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 5
DebounceTime5 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 5
OscillationCount5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 5
OscillationTime5 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 5
Threshold6 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 6
DebounceTime6 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 6
OscillationCount6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6
Table continues on next page

52
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OscillationTime6 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 6
Threshold7 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 7
DebounceTime7 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 7
OscillationCount7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7
OscillationTime7 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 7
Threshold8 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 8
DebounceTime8 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 8
OscillationCount8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 8
OscillationTime8 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 8
Threshold9 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 9
DebounceTime9 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 9
OscillationCount9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9
OscillationTime9 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 9

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for communication module

Table 10: COM05_12BI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 11: COM05_12BI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1
Threshold2 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 2
DebounceTime2 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 2
OscillationCount2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2
OscillationTime2 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 2
Threshold3 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 3
DebounceTime3 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 3
OscillationCount3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3
OscillationTime3 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 3
Table continues on next page

53
Technical manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Threshold4 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 4
DebounceTime4 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 4
OscillationCount4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 4
OscillationTime4 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 4
Threshold5 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 5
DebounceTime5 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 5
OscillationCount5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 5
OscillationTime5 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 5
Threshold6 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 6
DebounceTime6 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 6
OscillationCount6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6
OscillationTime6 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 6
Threshold7 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 7
DebounceTime7 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 7
OscillationCount7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7
OscillationTime7 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 7
Threshold8 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 8
DebounceTime8 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 8
OscillationCount8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 8
OscillationTime8 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 8
Threshold9 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 9
DebounceTime9 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 9
OscillationCount9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9
OscillationTime9 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 9
Threshold10 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 10
DebounceTime10 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 10
OscillationCount10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 10
OscillationTime10 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 10
Threshold11 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 11
DebounceTime11 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 11
OscillationCount11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 11
OscillationTime11 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 11
Threshold12 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 12
Table continues on next page

54
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DebounceTime12 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 12
OscillationCount12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 12
OscillationTime12 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 12

55
Technical manual
56
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
Table 12: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen 0-0 - 1 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block

57
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
Table 13: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 14: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI
are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication module GRP1_LED1 - - -
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block

58
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G

IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has
a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
Table 15: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 16: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

Table 17: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is
set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged

59
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.4 Settings
Table 18: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 19: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys Control FNKEYMD1 - - -
module FNKEYMD5

5.4.2 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1

IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function button.

60
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.3 Signals
Table 20: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 21: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
Table 22: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

Table 23: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Menu shortcut for
function key

61
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI

IEC12000175 V1 EN

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Display (LCD)
• Buttons
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

62
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000063-1-en.vsd

IEC13000063 V1 EN

Figure 8: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long
to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated
with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and
the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears
on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not
fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

63
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000045-1-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V1 EN

Figure 9: Truncated path

The number before the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

IEC12000025-2-en.vsd

IEC12000025 V2 EN

Figure 10: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three
alarm LED pages are available.

64
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

GUID-D20BB1F1-FDF7-49AD-9980-F91A38B2107D V1 EN

Figure 11: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

5.5.1.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs can be configured with
PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

5.5.1.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands to one
primary object, for example, a circuit breaker, disconnector or an earthing switch. The
push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and
switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

65
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC11000247 V2 EN

Figure 12: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 User Log on
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Ethernet communication port (RJ-45)
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Programmable alarm LEDs
23 Protection status LEDs

5.5.2 LED

5.5.2.1 Functionality

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is
controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that controls the color and the operating
mode.

66
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow and
red.

The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that
a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The
red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600 and configure the setting to Off, Start
or Trip for that particular signal.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

• LEDs, which are used in collecting mode of operation, are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs
defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S)
will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to
end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the
maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI
• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.

67
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

• From function input

• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
ACK_RST, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a
binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive
edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications
active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications
will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset function is
not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-
starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady
and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 13: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.

68
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 14: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is
as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in
parallel is shown in Figure 15.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 15: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the
signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets
a steady light.

69
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 16: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of
if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 17 it
is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after
acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority
signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 18.

70
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 18: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according
to Figure 19.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.

71
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 20: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to
Figure 21.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 21: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

72
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

73
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

74
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left
of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each
button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

75
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always gives the output the value. A change of the input value does not
affect the output value.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 26: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has
been written (the input has completed a pulse). Note that the input attribute is reset
each time the function block executes. The function block execution is marked with
a dotted line below.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time
the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects
it being high and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

76
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value

Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function
button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off.

There is an exception for the optional extension EXT1 function keys 7 and 8, since
they are tri-color (they can be red, yellow or green). Each of these LEDs are controlled
by three inputs, which are prioritized in the following order: Red - Yellow - Green
INPUT OUTPUT
RED YELLOW GREEN Function key LED color
1 0/1 0/1 red
- 1 0/1 yellow
- - 1 green
0 0 0 off

77
Technical manual
78
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Section 6 Current protection

6.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output PHPIOC

6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

6.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

6.1.3 Function block

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK

IEC08000001 V1 EN

Figure 29: PHPIOC function block

6.1.4 Signals
Table 24: PHPIOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 25: PHPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal

79
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.1.5 Settings
Table 26: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of IBase

Table 27: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.1.6 Monitored data

Table 28: PHPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

6.1.7 Operation principle

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental
frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase
current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase
output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

6.1.8 Technical data

Table 29: PHPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Table continues on next page

80
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Reset time 40 ms typically at 5 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

6.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC

6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN

6.2.2 Functionality
The four step phase overcurrent protection function, 3-phase output OC4PTOC has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 and 4 separately. Step 2 and 3 are
always definite time delayed.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.

The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to
be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually

81
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.2.3 Function block

OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKST1 TR3
BLKST2 TR4
BLKST3 START
BLKST4 ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
2NDHARM

IEC08000002-2-en.vsd

IEC08000002 V2 EN

Figure 30: OC4PTOC function block

6.2.4 Signals
Table 30: OC4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4

Table 31: OC4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 4
Table continues on next page

82
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Name Type Description

STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected

6.2.5 Settings
Table 32: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Phase current operate level for step1 in %
of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time delay of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 5 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Phase current operate level for step 2 in %
of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Definite time delay of step 2
Table continues on next page

83
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Phase current operate level for step3 in %
of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Definite time delay of step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Phase current operate level for step 4 in %
of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Definite time delay of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 5 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 4

Table 33: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
HarmRestrain Off - - Off Enable block from harmonic restrain
On
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IFund 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in %
of Fundamental
HarmRestrain1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
HarmRestrain2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
HarmRestrain3 Off - - Off Enable block of step3 from harmonic
On restrain
HarmRestrain4 Off - - Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

84
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Table 34: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement

6.2.6 Monitored data

Table 35: OC4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

6.2.7 Operation principle

The Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC is divided into
four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2,
3 and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/
Reverse.

The protection design can be divided in four parts:

• The direction element

• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
• The four step over current function
• The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

85
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740-2-en.vsd

IEC05000740 V2 EN

Figure 31: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function

block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to
select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS
option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition
to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current
DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values
are fed to OC4PTOC.

In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current
is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3
are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for
all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The START

86
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the selection
of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of
OC4PTOC.

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The
following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN (Equation 1)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 2)

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 3)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 4)

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 5)

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 6)

87
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Uref

2
4

Idir

IEC09000636_1_vsd
IEC09000636 V1 EN

Figure 32: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

1 RCA = Relay characteristic angle 55°

2 ROA = Relay operating angle 80°
3 Reverse
4 Forward

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed. A wide range of
standardized inverse time characteristics is available. The possibilities for inverse
time characteristics are described in section "Inverse time characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary
input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

88
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008.vsd

IEC12000008 V2 EN

Figure 33: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

6.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can
be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental
frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by
parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively
blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is
active, the OC4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value
one.

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-1-en.vsd

IEC13000014 V1 EN

Figure 34: Second harmonic blocking

89
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.2.9 Technical data

Table 36: OC4PTOC technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Min. operating current (5-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

2nd harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms

Minimum operate time for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
inverse characteristics
Inverse characteristics, see 15 curve types 1)ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 573, table 574 and table IEC 60255–151
575 ±3% or ±40 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Operate time, nondirectional 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

start function
Reset time, nondirectional start 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
function
Operate time, directional start 50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
function
Reset time, directional start 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

1) Note: Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off

6.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC

6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN

90
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current
from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from
a separate current input. EFPIOC can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

6.3.3 Function block

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK

IEC08000003 V1 EN

Figure 35: EFPIOC function block

6.3.4 Signals
Table 37: EFPIOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 38: EFPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

6.3.5 Settings
Table 39: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IN>> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase

Table 40: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

91
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.3.6 Monitored data

Table 41: EFPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

6.3.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as
well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current
value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a
comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the
function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal
from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output
signal TRIP.

6.3.8 Technical data

Table 42: EFPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 5x Iset -

Reset time 40 ms typically at 5 to 0x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

6.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero,

negative sequence direction EF4PTOC

92
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N/67N
protection, zero or negative sequence
direction 2

IEC11000263 V1 EN

6.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction
(EF4PTOC) has a settable inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 and 4
separately. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.

EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

The directional part of the function can be set to operate on following combinations:
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Polarizing voltage (U3PPol)
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Polarizing current (I3PPol)
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Dual polarizing (UPol+ZPol x IPol) where
ZPol = RPol + jXPol

IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.

Other setting combinations are possible, but not recommended.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually.

EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.

EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the
primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end
infeed functionality are available as well.

93
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.4.3 Function block

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
I3PPOL* TR2
I3PDIR* TR3
BLOCK TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ST4
STFW
STRV
2NDHARMD

IEC08000004-2-en.vsd

IEC08000004 V2 EN

Figure 36: EF4PTOC function block

6.4.4 Signals
Table 43: EF4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL inputs
I3PPOL GROUP - Three phase group signal for polarizing current
SIGNAL inputs
I3PDIR GROUP - Three phase group signal for operating directional
SIGNAL inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (start and trip)

Table 44: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
Table continues on next page

94
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Name Type Description

ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

6.4.5 Settings
Table 45: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnaDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization
(UN or U2) in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization (IN
or I2) in % of IBase
RPol 0.50 - 1000.00 ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source Z to be used for
current polarisation
XPol 0.50 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source Z to be used for
current polarisation
I>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current level (IN or I2) for direction
release in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Second harmonic restrain operation in %
of IN amplitude
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

95
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Operate residual current level for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Operate residual current level for step 2 in
% of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definite) time delay of step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step 2 in % of
IBase
HarmRestrain2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Operate residual current level for step 3 in
% of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent (definite) time delay of step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step 3 in % of
IBase
HarmRestrain3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
Table continues on next page

96
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Operate residual current level for step 4 in
% of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Independent (definite) time delay of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step 4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time in inverse curves
step 4
HarmRestrain4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 46: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SeqTypeUPol ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for polarizing
NegSeq voltage
SeqTypeIPol ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for polarizing
NegSeq current
SeqTypeIDir ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for directional
NegSeq current

97
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.4.6 Monitored data

Table 47: EF4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STDIR INTEGER 3=Both - Fault direction coded as
1=Forward integer
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
voltage and operating
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
current and operating
current
IOPDIR REAL - A Amplitude of the
directional operating
quantity

6.4.7 Operation principle

Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction
EF4PTOC function has the following four “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the
configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PPOL, input used for “Current Polarizing Quantity”.
4. I3PDIR, input used for “Operating Directional Quantity”.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

6.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

If the function is set to measure zero sequence, it uses Residual Current (3I0) for its
operating quantity. The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example,
connected to:

98
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases

(Holm-Green connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function Analog
Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from same
SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI AI3P connected to I3P
input)):

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN (Equation 7)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation
current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is
larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a
signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay,
activate the output signal STx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START signal.

6.4.7.2 Internal polarizing

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage
3U0 or the negative sequence voltage U2 as polarizing quantity U3P.

The residual voltage can be:

99
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input U3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then
connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC analog function input
U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3U0 from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

UPol =3U0 =(UL1+UL2+UL3)

IECEQUATION2407 V1 EN (Equation 9)

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT
inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.

The negative sequence voltage is calculated from the three-phase voltage input within
the IED by using the pre-processing block. The preprocessing block will calculate the
negative sequence voltage from the three inputs into the pre-processing block by using
the following formula:

U2 =(UL1+alpha × UL2 + alpha × UL3)/3

GUID-87DA8E2C-B3E5-42D6-B909-59EA3F9309D8 V1 EN (Equation 10)

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
alpha unit phasor with an angle of 120 degrees.

The polarizing phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional
current, in order to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In
order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter UpolMin.

It shall be noted that residual voltage (Un) or negative sequence voltage (U2) is used
to determine the location of the earth fault. This insures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the earth-fault function.

100
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current
(3I0) or the calculated negative sequence current (I2) as polarizing quantity IPol. The
user can select the required current.

The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system star
point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected
transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function analog input
I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In
such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs
into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN (Equation 11)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The negative sequence current can be calculated from the three-phase current input
within the IED by using the pre-processing block. The pre-processing block will
calculate the negative sequence current from the three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

I2 = (IL1+alpha 2 × IL2+alpha × IL3)/3

IECEQUATION2406 V1 EN (Equation 12)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
alpha phasor with an angle of 120 degrees.

The polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in

101
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the

following formula:

UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN (Equation 13)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating directional current,
in order to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be

bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s × IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) × Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V1 EN (Equation 14)

Upol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (Forward/
Reverse).

6.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx(where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if
available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence based overcurrent function.

6.4.7.4 Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

6.4.7.5 Internal earth-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

102
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

6.4.7.6 Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:

• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that
the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within each residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in a directional
element common for all steps.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic. By this parameter setting it is possible to select
inverse or definitive time delay for step 1 and 4 separately. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed. All of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics
are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to
section "Inverse time characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves and reset time
delay are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 37.

103
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Characteristn=DefTime
|IOP| AND
a OR tx TRINx
a>b
INx> b

AND
STINx

BLKSTx txmin
AND
BLOCK
Inverse
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled Characteristn=Inverse

Characteristn= Inverse will be valid

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
for n = 1 and 4
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC09000638_3_en.vsd

IEC09000638 V3 EN

Figure 37: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, STx and TRx and , can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx.

6.4.7.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
directional supervision element and the integrated directional
comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. The operating quantity current
I3PDIR is always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter
setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of
the following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 38, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

104
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR

STFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai

IEC11000243 V1 EN

Figure 38: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components

105
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int

AND
REVERSE_Int

SimplifiedlogicdiagramforresidualOC
IEC11000281-1-en.vsd
stagex-IEC11000281.vsd

IEC11000281 V1 EN

Figure 39: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components

106
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * I>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
I>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65 deg Upol = -U2

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
I>DIR

STFW

I op = I 2

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000269-2-en.ai

IEC11000269 V2 EN

Figure 40: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the
negative sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger

than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC function output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger

than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.

107
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 41:

| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin

Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin
T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F

UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN

Figure 41: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step

6.4.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step residual overcurrent protection function
EF4PTOC can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the
fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level
defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab. Any of the four residual overcurrent
stages can be selectively blocked by parameter setting HarmRestrainx. When 2nd
harmonic restraint feature is active the EF4PTOC function output signal
2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.

108
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AN OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
D

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

IEC13000015-1-en.vsd

IEC13000015 V1 EN

Figure 42: Second harmonic blocking

6.4.9 Technical data

Table 48: EF4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase ± 2.0% of Ir
comparison, Zero sequence
Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase ± 2.0% of Ir
comparison, Negative sequence
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I < Ir
± 1.0% of I at I >Ir

Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

characteristics
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table 15 curve types 1)ANSI/IEEE C37.112
573, table 574 and table 575 IEC 60255–151
±3% or ±40 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Table continues on next page

109
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum polarizing voltage, Zero (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
sequence
Minimum polarizing voltage, (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
Negative sequence
Minimum polarizing current, Zero (2–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
sequence
Minimum polarizing current, (2–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Negative sequence
Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Operate time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset -
start function
Reset time, non-directional start 30 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset -
function
Operate time, directional start 30 ms typically at 0,5 to 2 x IN -
function
Reset time, directional start 30 ms typically at 2 to 0,5 x IN -
function
1) Note: Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off.

6.5 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE

6.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

6.5.2 Functionality
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance earthing, the earth fault
current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the
magnitude of the fault current is almost independent on the fault location in the
network. The protection can be selected to use either the residual current, 3I0·cosj or
3I0·j, or residual power component 3U0·3I0·cos j, for operating quantity. There is
also available one non-directional 3I0 step and one non-directional 3U0 overvoltage
tripping step.

110
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.5.3 Function block

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKUN TRUN
START
STDIRIN
STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

IEC08000036 V1 EN

Figure 43: SDEPSDE function block

6.5.4 Signals
Table 49: SDEPSDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the non-directional voltage residual outputs

Table 50: SDEPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual overcurrent
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non-directional residual overcurrent
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non-directional residual overvoltage
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual overcurrent function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual overcurrent
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual overvoltage
STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for fault in forward
direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for fault in reverse
direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of directional
modes

111
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.5.5 Settings
Table 51: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release in
phase mode
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosPhi, directional
residual overcurrent, in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I0U0cosPhi, starting inverse
time count, in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual
overcurrent protection, in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of residual power for
inverse time count, in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non-directional residual
overcurrent, in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
overcurrent
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves
Table continues on next page

112
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

kIN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time multiplier for non-directional
residual overcurrent
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage
UN> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-dir residual voltage, % of
UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
overvoltage
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all directional
modes, in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release volt for all dir modes, %
of UBase

Table 52: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.5.6 Monitored data

Table 53: SDEPSDE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Mag of residual current
along polarizing qty
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and
3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)

6.5.7 Operation principle

6.5.7.1 Function inputs

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-
processor blocks.

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

113
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.5.7.2 Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage.
Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir, that is -3U0 rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir
(φ=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ). RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance
earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is
appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90° in an isolated
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0·cos φ
gets larger than the set value.

RCADir = 0 , ROADir = 0

3I0

ϕ = ang(3I0 ) − ang(3Uref )
−3U0 = Uref
3I0 ⋅ cosϕ

IEC06000648-3-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V3 EN

Figure 44: RCADir set to 0°

Uref
RCADir = −90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 ⋅ cos ϕ

ϕ = ang (3I0 ) − ang (Uref )

−3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN

Figure 45: RCADir set to -90°

114
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

For trip, both the residual current 3I0·cos φ and the release voltage 3U0, must be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>.

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite
time delay.

There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle φ is
larger than a set value as shown in figure 46. This is equivalent to blocking of the
function if φ > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.

RCADir = 0o

3I0
Operate area

j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cos j

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN

Figure 46: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0·cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle
error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 47:

115
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

RCADir = 0º

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (to prot)

3I0 (prim)

en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN

Figure 47: Explanation of RCAComp

6.5.7.3 Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (φ=ang(3I0)—ang(Uref) ). Uref
= -3U0 e-jRCADir. The function operates when 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ gets larger than the set
value.

For trip, both the residual power 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse
time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 · 3U0·cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.

This sub-function has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.

116
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN × (3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN (Equation 15)

6.5.7.4 Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle
φ = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref= -3U0) is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir

RCADir = 0º

ROADir = 80º

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN

Figure 48: Example of characteristic

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level INDir>, the release
voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level UNREL> and the angle φ shall be in the
set sector ROADir and RCADir.

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.

The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as φ is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir

This sub-function has definite time delay.

117
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.5.7.5 Directional functions

For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the
forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
start signal STFW.

6.5.7.6 Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum
of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with
high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault
protection will saturate.

This sub-function has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).

When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the output
signal is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary
output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.

6.5.7.7 Residual overvoltage release and protection

The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than
a set level.

There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this level set
voltage level.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signals are active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 49.

118
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

INNonDir> STNDIN
t TRNDIN

UN> STUN
t TRUN

OpMODE=3I0cosfi

IN>
&

INcosPhi>

OpMODE=3I03U0cosfi

& 1 & STARTDIRIN

INUNcosPhi> t

SN
& TRDIRIN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
TimeChar = InvTime
&
OpMODE=3I0 and fi

&
TimeChar = DefTime

DirMode = Forward &

Forward STFW

DirMode = Reverse
&
Reverse STRV

IEC09000147-2-en.vsd

IEC09000147 V2 EN

Figure 49: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth-fault current protection

119
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.5.8 Technical data

Table 54: SDEPSDE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0·cosj (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
directional residual ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
overcurrent
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of Ir: ±0.05% of Ir
(1.00-5.00)% of Ir: ±0.1% of Ir

Operate level for 3I0·3U0 · (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ± 2.0% of Sr at S £ Sr

cosj directional residual ± 2.0% of S at S > Sr
power
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of SBase

± 10% of set value

Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at £ Ir
residual overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of Ir: ±0.05% of Ir
(1.00-5.00)% of Ir: ±0.1% of Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

directional overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

At low setting <5% of Ir:

±0.1% of Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur

directional residual ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
overvoltage
Residual release current for (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
all directional modes ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of Ir: ±0.05% of Ir
(1.00-5.00)% of Ir: ±0.1% of Ir

Residual release voltage for (1.00 - 300.00)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur

all directional modes ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
Inverse characteristics, see 15 curve types ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 573, table 574 and table IEC 60255–151
575 ±3.0% or±90 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Relay characteristic angle (-179 to 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

RCA
Relay open angle ROA (0-90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Operate time, non-directional 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x 1set
residual over current
Reset time, non-directional 65 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 65 ms typically at 2 to 0 x 1set
residual over current
Table continues on next page

120
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate time, non-directional 45 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.5 x 45 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.5 x Uset
residual overvoltage Uset

Reset time, non-directional 85 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x 85 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset
residual overvoltage Uset

Operate time, directional 140 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x -

residual over current Iset

Reset time, directional 85 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset -

residual over current
Critical impulse time non- 35 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
directional residual over
current
Impulse margin time non- 25 ms typically -
directional residual over
current

6.6 Thermal overload protection, one time constant

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR

6.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius

Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26

constant, Fahrenheit

6.6.2 Functionality
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated
a need of a thermal overload protection also for power lines.

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either in Celsius
or in Fahrenheit depending on whether the function used is Thermal overload
protection one time constant, Celsius LCPTTR or Fahrenheit LFPTTR.

121
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after operation
are presented.

6.6.3 Function block

LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
AMBTEMP ALARM
SENSFLT LOCKOUT
RESET TEMP
TEMPAMB
TERMLOAD

IEC08000038-2-en.vsd
IEC08000038 V2 EN

LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
AMBTEMP ALARM
SENSFLT LOCKOUT
RESET TEMP
TEMPAMB
TERMLOAD

IEC11000246-1-en.vsd
IEC11000246 V1 EN

Figure 50: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function block

6.6.4 Signals
Table 55: LCPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

122
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Table 56: LFPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 57: LCPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
TEMP REAL Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL Ambient temperature used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature

Table 58: LFPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
TEMP REAL Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL Ambient temperature used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature

6.6.5 Settings
Table 59: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 Load current in % of IBase leading to TRef
temperature
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line
Table continues on next page

123
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 60: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Table 61: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 Load current in % of IBase leading to TRef
temperature
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 62: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

124
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.6.6 Monitored data

Table 63: LCPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of
lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature
of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature
used in the calculations

Table 64: LFPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of
lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - Temperature Calculated temperature
Fahrenheit of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperature Ambient temperature
Fahrenheit used in the calculations

6.6.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload
protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The temperature is
displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether LCPTTR/LFPTTR
function is selected.

From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø
EQUATION1167 V1 EN (Equation 16)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

125
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a
START output signal is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø
EQUATION1168 V1 EN (Equation 17)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal, TEMP.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
EQUATION1169 V1 EN (Equation 18)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when
the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated that is, a calculation of the cooling time to a
set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
EQUATION1170 V1 EN (Equation 19)

126
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL.

The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated “false” temperature level.

Final Temp START

> TripTemp

actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature

IL1, IL2, IL3 Calculation

of final
temperature

Actual Temp >

ALARM
AlarmTemp

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
Lock-
LOCKOUT
out
logic
Actual Temp
< Recl Temp

Calculation TTRIP
of time to
trip

Calculation
of time to TENRECL
reset of
lockout

IEC09000637_1_en.vsd

IEC09000637 V1 EN

Figure 51: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

127
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.6.8 Technical data

Table 65: LCPTTR/LFPTTRtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (0-400)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ± 2.0°C, ±2.0°F

Operate time: Time constant t = (0–1000) minutes IEC 60255-8, ±5% + 200
ms
æ I 2 - I p2 ö
t = t × ln ç ÷
ç I 2 - I ref 2 ÷
è ø
EQUATION1356 V2 EN (Equation 20)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current

Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ± 2.0°C

± 2.0°F
Trip temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ± 2.0°C
± 2.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ± 2.0°C
± 2.0°F

6.7 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF

6.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

6.7.2 Functionality
CCRBRF can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two
conditions.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF) ensures fast
back-up tripping of surrounding breakers in case the own breaker fails to open.
CCRBRF can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two
conditions.

128
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF) current criteria
can be fulfilled by one or two phase currents the residual current, or one phase current
plus residual current. When those currents exceed the user defined settings, the
function is triggered. These conditions increase the security of the back-up trip
command.

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a three-phase re-trip of the own breaker
to avoid inadvertent tripping of surrounding breakers.

6.7.3 Function block

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRRET
START
CBCLDL1
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3

IEC09000272_1_en.vsd

IEC09000272 V1 EN

Figure 52: CCRBRF function block

6.7.4 Signals
Table 66: CCRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3

Table 67: CCRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function

129
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.7.5 Settings
Table 68: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection principle for back-up trip
Contact
Current&Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip mode
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Operation mode of re-trip logic
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip

Table 69: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 Current for blocking of CB contact
operation in % of IBase

Table 70: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.7.6 Monitored data

Table 71: CCRBRF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual
current

130
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.7.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF is initiated from
protection trip command, either from protection functions within the IED or from
external protection devices.

The start signal is general for all three phases. A re-trip attempt can be made after a set
time delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without CB position check based
on current and/or contact evaluation. With the current check the re-trip is only
performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current
level. With contact check the re-trip is only performed if breaker is indicated as closed.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected
by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a
special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm
enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the
current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker
opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3

where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
• Back-up trip is always made with current or contact check. It is possible to have
this option activated for small load currents only.

30 ms
START
STL1 OR BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
R
BLOCK
OR Retrip Time Out L1 AND
Time out L1
Reset L1
BackupTrip L1

IEC09000976-2-en.vsd

IEC09000976 V2 EN

Figure 53: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

131
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

IP>
a
a>b
b

FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR

1 Contact Time out L1

Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1
BFP Started L1 AND CB Closed L1
OR

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b

CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND

IEC09000977-2-en.vsd

IEC09000977 V2 EN

Figure 54: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation

t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1
phases TRRETL2 OR
TRRET

200 ms
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR
OR

1 30 ms
OR

CB Pos Check AND

CB Closed L1

IEC16000502-1-en.vsd

IEC16000502 V1 EN

Figure 55: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

132
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

BUTripMode
1 out of 3
2 out of 4
OR
1 1 out of 4
AND
Current High L1

BFP Started L1
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

Contact Closed L1
OR

Current High L2 OR
From other Current High L3 AND Backup Time Out L1
phases
Current High L1

t2
30 ms
BFP Started L1 t Backup Trip L1
OR AND
60 s OR

AND t

AND
OR OR
200 ms
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
AND

BFP Started L2 AND OR

From other
phases BFP Started L3 AND

IEC16000503-1-en.vsd

IEC16000503 V1 EN

Figure 56: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, and Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.

6.7.8 Technical data

Table 72: CCRBRF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
current ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase > 95% -

current
Operate residual (2-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
current ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Phase current level (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
for blocking of ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
contact function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Table continues on next page

133
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±10 ms
Operate time for 20 ms typically -
current detection
Reset time for current 10 ms maximum -
detection

6.8 Stub protection STBPTOC

6.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN

6.8.2 Functionality
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector
is opened the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part.
The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be
blocked.

The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers and
the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released
from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

6.8.3 Function block

STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
RELEASE

IEC08000051 V1 EN

Figure 57: STBPTOC function block

134
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.8.4 Signals
Table 73: STBPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection

Table 74: STBPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal

6.8.5 Settings
Table 75: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
I> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase

Table 76: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.8.6 Monitored data

Table 77: STBPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

6.8.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a

135
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the RMS

values are compared to the set operating current value of the function I>.

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator
for this phase is activated. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the
TRIP output signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the
BLOCK input.

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
STIL1 AND

STIL2 OR

STIL3

RELEASE

en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN

Figure 58: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

6.8.8 Technical data

Table 78: STBPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (1-2500)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

6.9 Pole discordance protection CCRPLD

136
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCRPLD 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN

6.9.2 Functionality
Circuit breakers and disconnectors can end up with the phases in different positions
(close-open), due to electrical or mechanical failures. An open phase can cause
negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines
and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current
functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists
the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.

The pole discordance function operates based on information from the circuit breaker
logic with additional criteria from phase selective current unsymmetry.

6.9.3 Function block

CCRPLD
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND

IEC08000041 V1 EN

Figure 59: CCRPLD function block

6.9.4 Signals
Table 79: CCRPLD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic

137
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Table 80: CCRPLD Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

6.9.5 Settings
Table 81: CCRPLD Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and trip
signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

Table 82: CCRPLD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.9.6 Monitored data

Table 83: CCRPLD Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

6.9.7 Operation principle

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 60.

138
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd

IEC05000287 V2 EN

Figure 60: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is
started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse
150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.

BLOCK

ContSel
AND
EXTPDIND

tTrip 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

CLOSECMD tTrip+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

CurrSel AND

Unsymmetrical
current detection

IEC08000014-2-en.vsd
IEC08000014 V2 EN

Figure 61: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and
current based

The pole discrepancy protection is blocked if the input signal BLOCK is high.

139
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.

If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate
a trip signal TRIP:

• Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.

6.9.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole
discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal in figure 60. After a settable time tTrip, a 150 ms trip pulse
command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.

6.9.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected. This detection is

enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next
200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the
unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during
unsymmetrical load conditions.

The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can
be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field
(that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

140
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.9.8 Technical data

Table 84: CCRPLD technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, current (0-100) % ± 1.0% of Ir
asymmetry level
Reset ratio >95% -
Time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

6.10 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

6.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

6.10.2 Functionality
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will
give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

6.10.3 Function block

BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START

IEC09000277_1_en.vsd
IEC09000277 V1 EN

Figure 62: BRCPTOC function block

6.10.4 Signals
Table 85: BRCPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

141
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Table 86: BRCPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic

6.10.5 Settings
Table 87: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Unbalance current operation value in
percent of max current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of Ibase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 88: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.10.6 Monitored data

Table 89: BRCPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of
phase currents

6.10.7 Operation principle

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring
elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest
phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

142
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines.
If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 63

BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

• The IED is in test mode and BRCPTOC has been blocked from the HMI test menu
(Blocked=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> or

IL3<50%IP>

IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN

Figure 63: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

143
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.10.8 Technical data

Table 90: BRCPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (50-90)% of maximum current ± 2.0% of Ir

Timer (0.00-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

Operate time for start function 35 ms typically -
Reset time for start function 30 ms typically -
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically -
Impulse margin time 10 ms typically -

6.11 Directional over-/under-power protection

GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP

6.11.1 Functionality
The directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP can be used
wherever a high/low active, reactive or apparent power protection or alarming is
required. The functions can alternatively be used to check the direction of active or
reactive power flow in the power system. There are a number of applications where
such functionality is needed. Some of them are:

• detection of reversed active power flow

• detection of high reactive power flow

Each function has two steps with definite time delay.

6.11.2 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

6.11.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

144
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.11.2.2 Function block

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC08000506-2-en.vsd
IEC08000506 V2 EN

Figure 64: GOPPDOP function block

6.11.2.3 Signals
Table 91: GOPPDOP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 92: GOPPDOP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
START1 BOOLEAN Start signal from stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start signal from stage 2
P REAL Active Power
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of calculated power base value
Q REAL Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of calculated power base
value

145
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.11.2.4 Settings
Table 93: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode 1
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode 2
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2

Table 94: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 95: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

146
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.11.2.5 Monitored data

Table 96: GOPPDOP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
calculated power base
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
calculated power base
value

6.11.3 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

6.11.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

6.11.3.2 Function block

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC08000507-2-en.vsd
IEC08000507 V2 EN

Figure 65: GUPPDUP function block

147
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.11.3.3 Signals
Table 97: GUPPDUP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 98: GUPPDUP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
START1 BOOLEAN Start signal from stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start signal from stage 2
P REAL Active Power
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of calculated power base value
Q REAL Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of calculated power base
value

6.11.3.4 Settings
Table 99: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode 1
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode 2
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2

148
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Table 100: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 101: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

6.11.3.5 Monitored data

Table 102: GUPPDUP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
calculated power base
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
calculated power base
value

6.11.4 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 66. The function has two stages with individual settings.

149
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN

Figure 66: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 103.
Table 103: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 21)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 22)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 23)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 24)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 25)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 26)
Table continues on next page

150
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 27)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 28)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 29)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip
from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis
for stage 1(2) is 0.5 p.u. for Power1(2) ≥ 1.0 p.u., else the hysteresis is 0.5 Power1(2).

If the measured power drops under the (Power1(2) - hysteresis) value, the over-power
function will reset after 0.06 seconds. If the measured power comes over the
(Power1(2) + hysteresis) value, the under-power function will reset after 0.06
seconds. The reset means that the start signal will drop out and that the timer of the
stage will reset.

6.11.4.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

151
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 30)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k=0.92
in case of slow operating functions.

6.11.5 Technical data

Table 104: GOPPDOP, GUPPDUP technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ± 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

(1.0-2.0)% of SBase < ± 50% of set value

(2.0-10)% of SBase < ± 20% of set value
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees 2 degrees
Timers (0.010 - 6000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

6.12 Negative sequence based overcurrent function

DNSPTOC

6.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence based overcurrent DNSPTOC 46
function
3I2>

IEC09000132 V2 EN

152
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

6.12.2 Functionality
Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC is typically used as
sensitive earth-fault protection of power lines, where incorrect zero sequence
polarization may result from mutual induction between two or more parallel lines.

Additionally, it is applied in applications on cables, where zero sequence impedance

depends on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative sequence impedance
is practically constant.

The directional function is current and voltage polarized. The function can be set to
forward, reverse or non-directional independently for each step. Both steps are
provided with a settable definite time delay.

DNSPTOC protects against all unbalanced faults including phase-to-phase faults. The
minimum start current of the function must be set to above the normal system
unbalance level in order to avoid unwanted operation.

6.12.3 Function block

DNSPTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 START
ENMLTOC1 STOC1
BLKOC2 STOC2
ENMLTOC2 DIROC1
DIROC2
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

IEC09000125-1-en.vsd
IEC09000125 V1 EN

Figure 67: DNSPTOC function block

6.12.4 Signals
Table 105: DNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier - step1 (OC1)
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier - step 2 (OC2)

153
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

Table 106: DNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 (OC1)
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 (OC2)
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 (OC1)
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2 (OC2)
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of step 1(non-directional,
forward, reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of step 2 (non-directional,
forward, reverse)
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

6.12.5 Settings
Table 107: DNSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay characteristic angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay operate angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Voltage level in % of Ubase below which
ActLowVolt control takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation Off/On for step 1 (OC1)
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 200.0 %IB 1.0 10.0 Operate current level in % of IBase for
step 1 (OC1)
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
1 (OC1)
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay for step
1 (OC1)
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (non-
Forward directional, forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on I & U or IcosPhi & U for step
IcosPhi&U 1 (OC1)
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Block Low votlage level action for step 1 (Non-
Block directional, Block, Memory)
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation Off/On for step 2 (OC2)
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 200.0 %IB 1.0 10.0 Operate current level in % of Ibase for step
2 (OC2)
Table continues on next page

154
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
2 (OC2)
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay for step
2 (OC2)
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (non-
Forward directional, forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on I & U or IcosPhi & U for step
IcosPhi&U 2 (OC2)
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Block Low votlage level action for step 2 (Non-
Block directional, Block, Memory)

Table 108: DNSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.12.6 Monitored data

Table 109: DNSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage
and current

6.12.7 Operation principle

Negative sequence based overcurrent function (DNSPTOC) has two settable current
levels, setting parameters StartCurr_OC1 and StartCurr_OC2. Both features have
definite time characteristics with settings tDef_OC1 and tDef_OC2 respectively. It is
possible to change the direction of these steps to forward, reverse or non-directional
by setting parameters DirMode_OC1 and DirMode_OC2. At too low polarizing
voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked or non-directional. This is
controlled by settings ActLowVolt1_VM and ActLowVolt2_VM.

155
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Current protection

6.12.8 Technical data

Table 110: DNSPTOC Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (2.0 - 200.0) % of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I <Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95 % -

Low polarizing voltage level (0.0 - 5.0) % of UBase < ± 0.5% of Ur

Relay characteristic angle (-180 - 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (1 - 90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Timers (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Operate time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time, non-directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Operate time, directional 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time, directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Dynamic overreach < 10% at t = 300 ms -

156
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

7.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, where step 1 is settable as inverse or definite time
delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

7.1.3 Function block

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKST1 TR2
BLKST2 START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2

IEC09000285_1_en.vsd
IEC09000285 V1 EN

Figure 68: UV2PTUV function block

157
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

7.1.4 Signals
Table 111: UV2PTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 112: UV2PTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

7.1.5 Settings
Table 113: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
UBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
Table continues on next page

158
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2< 1 - 100 %UB 1 50 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
UBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definie time delay of step 2

Table 114: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS

7.1.6 Monitored data

Table 115: UV2PTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

7.1.7 Operation principle

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one,
two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START
signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage
remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay,
the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is settable for step
1 and can be either definite or inverse time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time
delayed.

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value.
The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related
settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase voltage.
This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

159
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

U < (%) ⋅UBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1429 V2 EN (Equation 31)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN (Equation 32)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

7.1.7.1 Measurement principle

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phase-

to-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs.
Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(IDMT). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time delay two
different modes are available; inverse curve A and inverse curve B.

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
EQUATION1431 V2 EN (Equation 33)

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
EQUATION1432 V2 EN (Equation 34)

160
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details
of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 19.3 "Inverse time
characteristics".

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

IEC12000186-1-en.vsd

IEC12000186 V1 EN

Figure 69: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, the corresponding start output is reset.

7.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.1.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria
to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 70.

161
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

UL1 or UL12 Comparator ST1L1

U < U1< Phase1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 or UL23 Comparator OpMode1 Phase2
U < U1< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 ST1L3
Phase3 Start
UL3 or UL31 Comparator 3 out of 3
&
U < U1< Trip ST1
OR
Output
START Logic

Step 1
TR1
Time integrator TRIP OR
MinVoltSelect or Timer t1

Comparator
U < U2< Phase1
Voltage Phase ST2
Selector OR
Comparator OpMode2 Phase2
U < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3
Phase3 Start
Comparator 3 out of 3
&
U < U2< Trip
Output
START Logic

Step 2
Timer TRIP TR2
t2 OR

OR START

TRIP
OR

IEC08000016-3-en.vsd
IEC08000016 V3 EN

Figure 70: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

7.1.8 Technical data

Table 116: UV2PTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur
and high step
Reset ratio <102% -
Inverse time - See table 577
characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 577
Table continues on next page

162
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
step 1
Definite time delays, (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
step 2
Minimum operate (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
time, inverse
characteristics
Operate time, start 30 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.5Uset -
function
Reset time, start 40 ms typically at 0.5 to 1.2 xUset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN

7.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open line
ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to
supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch
in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.

OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite time
delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

163
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

7.2.3 Function block

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKST1 TR2
BLKST2 START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2

IEC09000278-2-en.vsd
IEC09000278 V2 EN

Figure 71: OV2PTOV function block

7.2.4 Signals
Table 117: OV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 118: OV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

164
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

7.2.5 Settings
Table 119: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1 - 200 %UB 1 120 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
UBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2> 1 - 200 %UB 1 150 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
UBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definite time delay of step 2

Table 120: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS

7.2.6 Monitored data

Table 121: OV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

165
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

7.2.7 Operation principle

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is issued.
OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of
the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip
signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV
phase-to-phase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set global base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-
earth voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1434 V1 EN (Equation 35)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN (Equation 36)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

7.2.7.1 Measurement principle

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3
or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to
issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

166
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

7.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(IDMT). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time delay three
different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ U -U > ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
IEC09000051 V1 EN (Equation 37)

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U > ø
IECEQUATION2287 V1 EN (Equation 38)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U > ø
IECEQUATION2288 V1 EN (Equation 39)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see Figure 72. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse time characteristics".

167
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

IEC05000016-2-en.vsd

IEC05000016 V2 EN

Figure 72: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

A TRIP requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time
delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and
by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If
the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, the corresponding START output is reset.

7.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.2.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared
to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection
(OV2PTOV) is schematically described in Figure 73.

168
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

UL1 or UL12 Comparator ST1L1

U > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 or UL23 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
U > U1> 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start
UL3 or UL31 Comparator &
U> U1> Trip ST1
OR
Output
START Logic

Step 1
TR1
Time integrator TRIP
MaxVoltSelect OR
Timer t1

Comparator
U> U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2 ST2
OR
U> U2> 1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start
Comparator &
U > U2> Trip
Output
START Logic

Step 2

Timer TRIP TR2

OR
t2

START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC08000012-3-en.vsd
IEC08000012 V3 EN

Figure 73: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV)

169
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

7.2.8 Technical data

Table 122: OV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, (1-200)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur
step 1 and 2 ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio >98% -

Inverse time - See table 576
characteristics for
steps 1 and 2, see
table 576
Definite time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
step 1
Definite time delays, (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
step 2
Minimum operate (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
time, Inverse
characteristics
Operate time, start 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
function
Reset time, start 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0>

IEC10000168 V1 EN

7.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from
a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.

170
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite time
delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

7.3.3 Function block

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKST1 TR2
BLKST2 START
ST1
ST2

IEC09000273_1_en.vsd

IEC09000273 V1 EN

Figure 74: ROV2PTOV function block

7.3.4 Signals
Table 123: ROV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 124: ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

7.3.5 Settings
Table 125: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Table continues on next page

171
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1> 1 - 200 %UB 1 30 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
UBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 45 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
UBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definite time delay of step 2

Table 126: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.3.6 Monitored data

Table 127: ROV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

7.3.7 Operation principle

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect earth (zero
sequence) overvoltages. The ground overvoltage 3U0 is normally computed by
adding the input phase voltages. 3U0 may also be input single phase by either
measuring directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer,
or from a secondary broken delta connection of a transformer with a star-grounded
primary. ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If the ground
overvoltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is setable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global phase-to-phase base
voltage divided by √3.

172
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

7.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.3.7.2 Time delay

7.3.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) partially

or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKST1: blocks all startand trip outputs related to step 1
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2

7.3.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is
schematically described in Figure 75.

173
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
TR1
START Start
&
Trip
Output
Time integrator Logic
TRIP
or Timer t1
Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2

Start
START &
Trip START
OR
Output
Logic
Timer TRIP
t2
Step 2
TRIP
OR

IEC08000013-3-en.vsd
IEC08000013 V3 EN

Figure 75: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

(ROV2PTOV)

The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

(ROV2PTOV) is schematically described in Figure 75. UN is a signal
included in the three phase group signal U3P which shall be connected
to output AI3P of the SMAI. If a connection is made to the 4 input
GRPxN (x is equal to instance number 2 to 12) on the SMAI, UN is
this signal else UN is the vectorial sum of the three inputs GRPxL1 to
GRPxL3.

174
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

7.3.8 Technical data

Table 128: ROV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, (1-200)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur
step 1 ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate voltage, (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U < Ur

step 2 ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio > 98% -

Inverse time - See table 578
characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 578
Definite time setting, (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
step 1
Definite time setting, (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
step 2
Minimum operate (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
time for step 1
inverse characteristic
Operate time, start 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
function
Reset time, start 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 1.2 xUset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

7.4.2 Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than
the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF.

175
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

7.4.3 Function block

LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
BLKU

IEC09000279_1_en.vsd
IEC09000279 V1 EN

Figure 76: LOVPTUV function block

7.4.4 Signals
Table 129: LOVPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
BLKU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 130: LOVPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal

7.4.5 Settings
Table 131: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in% of base voltage
Ubase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Table 132: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages
are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

176
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 133: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.4.6 Operation principle

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if
the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START output
signal indicates start.

Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages

have been detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least
tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit
breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function
block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length
set by setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU input)

and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in test mode and LOVPTUV
has been blocked from the HMI test menu (Blocked = Yes).

177
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Voltage protection

IEC08000011 V2 EN

Figure 77: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

7.4.7 Technical data

Table 134: LOVPTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (0–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio <105% -

Pulse timer (0.050–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Timers (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

178
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 8
Frequency protection

Section 8 Frequency protection

8.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

8.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of sufficient generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is

used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so
on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.

8.1.3 Function block

SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN

IEC09000282_1_en.vsd
IEC09000282 V1 EN

Figure 78: SAPTUF function block

179
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Frequency protection

8.1.4 Signals
Table 135: SAPTUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 136: SAPTUF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage
amplitude

8.1.5 Settings
Table 137: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency if frequency is above
frequency value

8.1.6 Monitored data

Table 138: SAPTUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

8.1.7 Operation principle

The underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) function is used to detect low power
system frequency. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
greater than the set time delay the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due
to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled
blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the

180
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 8
Frequency protection

voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the
function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

8.1.7.1 Measurement principle

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas
in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in the Basic IED Functions
chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPTUF gets
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in
percent of the setting of the global parameter UBase.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

BLOCK

BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
freqNotValid

Start
& START
DefiniteTimeDelay START
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < StartFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

IEC09000034-1.vsd

IEC09000034 V1 EN

Figure 79: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

8.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for SAPTUF is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting
tDelay.

Trip signal issuing requires that the under frequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. If the START ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a defined reset time, the START output is reset.

181
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Frequency protection

When the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting
RestoreFreq, a 100ms pulse is given on the output RESTORE after a settable time
delay (tRestore).

8.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF completely, by binary

input signal:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

8.1.7.4 Design

The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is schematically described in

figure 79.

Figure 80: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

8.1.8 Technical data

Table 139: SAPTUF Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz at
symmetrical three-
phase voltage
Operate value, restore (45 - 65) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
frequency
Reset ratio <1.001 -
Operate time, start function At 50 Hz: 200 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz to fset -
-0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 170 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz to fset
-0.5 Hz
Reset time, start function At 50 Hz: 60 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset -
+0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 50 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset
+0.5 Hz
Operate time delay (0.000-60.000)s <250 ms
Restore time delay (0.000-60.000)s <150 ms

8.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

182
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 8
Frequency protection

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

8.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.

SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation
shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating
load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

8.2.3 Function block

SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDMAGN

IEC09000280_1_en.vsd
IEC09000280 V1 EN

Figure 81: SAPTOF function block

8.2.4 Signals
Table 140: SAPTOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

183
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Frequency protection

Table 141: SAPTOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude

8.2.5 Settings
Table 142: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay

8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 143: SAPTOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

8.2.7 Operation principle

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period greater than the set time delay the TRIP signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in
the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is
issued.

8.2.7.1 Measurement principle

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas
in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is discussed in the Basic IED Functions
chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter UBase, SAPTOF
is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in

184
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 8
Frequency protection

percent of the global parameter UBase. To avoid oscillations of the output START
signal, a hysteresis has been included.

BLOCK

BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
freqNotValid

Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START START
Definite Time Delay
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP

TRIP

IEC09000033-1.vsd

IEC09000033 V1 EN

Figure 82: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF

8.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for SAPTOF is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting
tDelay.

If the START condition frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a defined reset time, the START output is reset.

8.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Over frequency protection (SAPTOF) completely, by binary

input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

8.2.7.4 Design

The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in

figure 82.

185
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Frequency protection

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735.vsd

IEC05000735 V1 EN

Figure 83: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF

8.2.8 Technical data

Table 144: SAPTOF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz at
symmetrical three-
phase voltage
Reset ratio >0.999 -
Operate time, start function At 50 Hz: 200 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset -
+0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 170 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset
+0.5 Hz
Reset time, start function At 50 and 60 Hz: 55 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz -
to fset-0.5 Hz

Timer (0.000-60.000)s <250 ms

8.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

186
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 8
Frequency protection

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

8.3.2 Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

8.3.3 Function block

SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN

IEC09000281_1_en.vsd
IEC09000281 V1 EN

Figure 84: SAPFRC function block

8.3.4 Signals
Table 145: SAPFRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 146: SAPFRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude

187
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Frequency protection

8.3.5 Settings
Table 147: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore is enabled if frequency is above
set frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay

8.3.6 Operation principle

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. It has a settable definite time delay.To avoid an
unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a
voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing
function that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the
preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is
issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

8.3.6.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value(StartFreqGrad). If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing
function, which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC is
blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, a
100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a
value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets
SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.6.2 Time delay

SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.

Trip signal issuing requires that SAPFRC condition continues for at least the user set
time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, ceases during the delay time and is not

188
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 8
Frequency protection

fulfilled again within a defined reset time, the START output is reset after the reset
time has elapsed.

After an issue of the TRIP output signal, the RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set after
a time delay (tRestore), when the measured frequency has returned to the level
corresponding to RestoreFreq. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is
disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for
lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative
frequency gradient is detected during the restore period.

8.3.6.3 Design

BLOCK

BLOCK
OR

freqNotValid BLKDMAGN

Start
Rate-of-Change &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output START
[StartFreqGrad<0 START Logic
AND
df/dt < StartFreqGrad] tTrip
OR
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

tRestore
f > RestoreFreq

IEC08000009_en_1.vsd

IEC08000009 V1 EN

Figure 85: Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

189
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Frequency protection

8.3.7 Technical data

Table 148: SAPFRC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore (45.00 - 65.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
enable frequency
Timers (0.000 - 60.000) s <130 ms
Operate time, start function At 50 Hz: 100 ms typically -
At 60 Hz: 80 ms typically

190
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

Section 9 Secondary system supervision

9.1 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF - 87

9.1.2 Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open

CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.

Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

9.1.3 Function block

CCSRDIF
I3P* FAIL
BLOCK ALARM
IREF

IEC08000055-1-en.vsd
IEC08000055 V1 EN

Figure 86: CCSRDIF function block

191
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

9.1.4 Signals
Table 149: CCSRDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Group signal for current reference
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 150: CCSRDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

9.1.5 Settings
Table 151: CCSRDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential level
in % of IBase

Table 152: CCSRDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ip>Block 5 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 153: CCSRDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.1.6 Operation principle

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |ΣIphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 87.

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

192
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSRDIF is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-
gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +å
IL2 å
IL3 IL3 -
+å +å
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms

20 ms 100 ms

150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK

en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN

Figure 87: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 88.

193
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

| åI phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 88: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I
phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

9.1.7 Technical data

Table 154: CCSRDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-200)% of Ir ± 10.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 10.0% of I at I > Ir

Block current (5-500)% of Ir ± 5.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 5.0% of I at I > Ir

9.2 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF - -

194
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.2.2 Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function SDDRFUF is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might
occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage
and delta current detection.

The negative sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of negative sequence voltage 3U2 without the presence of the
negative-sequence current 3I2.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a
high value of zero sequence voltage 3U0 without the presence of the zero sequence
current 3I0.

For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation
modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station
operations.

9.2.3 Function block

SDDRFUF
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS

IEC08000220 V1 EN

Figure 89: SDDRFUF function block

195
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

9.2.4 Signals
Table 155: SDDRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage
circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open

Table 156: SDDRFUF Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases

9.2.5 Settings
Table 157: SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
Table continues on next page

196
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase

Table 158: SDDRFUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

Table 159: SDDRFUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero
sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

9.2.7 Operation principle

9.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates: (see figure 90)

197
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and 3I0>,
3U2< and 3I2>.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative
sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.

A drop off delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd

IEC10000036 V2 EN

Figure 90: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

198
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 91. The calculation of the
change is based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude and
phase angle changes. The calculated delta quantities are compared with their
respective set values DI< and DU> and the algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a
sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in each
phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:

• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled for a phase:

• The magnitude of the phase-earth voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5
cycle
• The magnitude of DU is higher than the setting DU>
• The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI>

and at least one of the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting
IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with a current
in the same phase greater than 50P will set the output. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line
is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not necessarily
followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase
while the circuit breaker is closed. A fault occurs with an open circuit breaker at one
end and closed at the other end, could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function
at the end with the open breaker. If this is considered to be a disadvantage, connect the
CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the first criterion can activate the delta
function.

199
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1 One cycle
delay
|DI|
a
a>b
DI< b

UL1 One cycle

delay
|DU|
a
a>b AND
DU> b

20 ms 1.5 cycle
a
a>b t t
UPh> b

IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2

UL2

Same logic as for phase 1

IL3 DUDI detection Phase 3

UL3

Same logic as for phase 1

UL1
a
a<b
b

IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND

OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR

UL2
a
a<b
b

IL2
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

UL3
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND FuseFailDetDUDI
AND OR
OR

IEC10000034-1-en.vsd
IEC10000034 V1 EN

Figure 91: Simplified logic diagram for DU/DI detection part

200
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.2.7.3 Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 92. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be
dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all
three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a<b
b

IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b

UDLD<

intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN

Figure 92: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

9.2.7.4 Main logic

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 93. The fuse failure
supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to On or Off.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating
modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation
modes are:

• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.

201
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
parallel (OR-condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working
in series (AND-condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released,
the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be
activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not
activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for blocking voltage related
measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). For
blocking of impedance protection functions, output BLKZ shall be used.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below
the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long
as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop
below the set value USealIn< and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On the output
signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ signals will now
be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<.

If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in
the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power
interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-
volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut
down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-
activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents
are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit
breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a terminal binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of
the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs
the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage
dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the
miniature circuit breaker.

202
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be affected
since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance
protection.

203
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR

All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

UNsINs
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

200 ms
DeadLineDet1Ph AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKU
60 sec
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5 sec
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED

DISCPOS

IEC10000041-1-en.vsd
IEC10000041 V1 EN

Figure 93: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic

204
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.2.8 Technical data

Table 160: SDDRFUF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ± 1.0% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1–100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1–100)% of UBase ± 5.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ± 5.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1-100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1-100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir

9.3 Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR

9.3.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR - -

9.3.2 Functionality
The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control
circuit of the circuit breaker. The trip circuit supervision generates a current of
approximately 1 mA through the supervised control circuit. The validity supervision
of a control circuit is provided for power output contacts T1, T2 and T3.

The trip circuit supervision operates after a settable definite operating time and resets
after a settable definite time when the fault disappears.

9.3.3 Function block

GUID-6F85BD70-4D18-4A00-A410-313233025F3A V2 EN

Figure 94: Function block

205
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Secondary system supervision

9.3.4 Signals
Table 161: TCSSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
TCS_STATE BOOLEAN 0 Trip circuit fail indication from I/O-card
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 162: TCSSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Trip circuit fault indication

9.3.5 Settings
Table 163: TCSSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tDelay 0.020 - 300.000 s 0.001 3.000 Operate time delay

9.3.6 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of trip circuit supervision can be described by using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-9D3B79CB-7E06-4260-B55F-B7FA004CB2AC V1 EN

Figure 95: Functional module diagram

Trip circuit supervision generates a current of approximately 1.0 mA

through the supervised circuit. It must be ensured that this current will
not cause a latch up of the controlled object.

206
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 9
Secondary system supervision

To protect the trip circuit supervision circuits in the IED, the output
contacts are provided with parallel transient voltage suppressors. The
breakdown voltage of these suppressors is 400 +/– 20 V DC.

Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set value tDelay is elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the maximum
time value, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs during the
operate time up counting, the reset timer is activated.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timer.

9.3.7 Technical data

Table 164: TCSSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate time delay (0.020 - 300.000) s ± 0,5% ± 110 ms

207
Technical manual
208
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Section 10 Control

10.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN

10.1.2 Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks that

the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1½ breaker or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided.

The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The
synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip
frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the
circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

209
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.1.3 Function block

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK FRDIFSYN
UB1FF FRDERIVA
UB2OK UOKSC
UB2FF UDIFFSC
ULN1OK FRDIFFA
ULN1FF PHDIFFA
ULN2OK FRDIFFM
ULN2FF PHDIFFM
STARTSYN INADVCLS
TSTSYNCH UDIFFME
TSTSC FRDIFFME
TSTENERG PHDIFFME
AENMODE UBUS
MENMODE ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

IEC08000219_3_en.vsd
IEC08000219 V3 EN

Figure 96: SESRSYN function block

10.1.4 Signals
Table 165: SESRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
Table continues on next page

210
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 166: SESRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
Table continues on next page

211
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

10.1.5 Settings
Table 167: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
URatio 0.500 - 2.000 - 0.001 1.000 Multiplication factor for minor internal
adjustmernt of measured line voltage for
synchro functions
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
Table continues on next page

212
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check function
On Off/On
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

213
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Table 168: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GblBaseSelBus 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Line
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence

10.1.6 Monitored data

Table 169: SESRSYN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

214
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.1.7 Operation principle

10.1.7.1 Basic functionality

The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output
is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker
and the closing circuit.

For single circuit breaker double bus and 1½ breaker circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For single circuit breaker double bus arrangements, selection of the correct
voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1½ breaker
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus/line disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
settings with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.

10.1.7.2 Synchrocheck

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
calculated by the SESRSYN function and are available for the synchrocheck function
for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as
phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done by selecting
the corresponding phases for the measurement in the settings for the SESRSYN
function. In addition the phase angle difference has to be compensated for by the
setting PhaseShift. The setting scales the line voltage and adjust the phase angle equal
to the bus voltage.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with internally preset values
that are set to be 80% of the UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and GlbBaseSelLine.

If both sides are higher than 80% of the Ubase values, the measured values are
compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage
difference: FreqDiff, PhaseDiffand UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the

215
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

use of different voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line
voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The function is
only released if the frequency difference is less than the fixed set value of +/-5 Hz.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.

UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM,
PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and
phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if
the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller
than 5 degrees.

216
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

BLKSC AND
BLOCK OR
AUTOSYOK
AND
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
Bus voltage >80%
of GblBaseSelBus
UOKSC
Line voltage >80% AND
of GblBaseSelLine
UDIFFSC
1

FreqDiffA FRDIFFA
1

PhaseDiffA PHDIFFA
1

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

80 ms 100 ms
INADVCLS
AND t AND
PhaseDiff > 60°

PhaseDiff < 5°

IEC08000018_3_en.vsd
IEC08000018 V3 EN

Figure 97: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

10.1.7.3 Synchronizing

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with internally preset
values that are set to be 80% of the set UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and
GlbBaseSelLine, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. Also the
voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the internally preset value 0.10, which
is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the preset values
and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are
also compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and
FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which
has to be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.

217
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation
to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function
will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch
time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long
time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.

SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON

TEST MODE=ON

STARTSYN SYNPROGR
AND
AND
S
BLKSYNCH
OR R

Voltage difference between

U-Bus and U-Line < 0.10 p.u

Bus voltage > 80% of SYNOK

50 ms AND
GblBaseSelBus
AND t
Line voltage > 80% of
GblBaseSelLine
OR

AND
TSTSYNOK
FreqDiffMax OR

FreqDiffMin
tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine ± 5 Hz tMax
Synch
PhaseDiff < 15 deg AND SYNFAIL

PhaseDiff=closing angle

FreqDiff
Close pulse
tBreaker in advance

IEC08000020-5-en.vsd

IEC08000020 V5 EN

Figure 98: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

10.1.7.4 Energizing check

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. To be considered live, the value must be above 80% of set UBase selected

218
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

for GblBaseSelBus or GblBaseSelLine and to be considered dead it must be below

40% of set UBase selected forGblBaseSelBus or GblBaseSelLine.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example,
can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall
be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of
INTZERO output from Fixed Signals (FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the
setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs
MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and
3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a
separate test output.

10.1.7.5 Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED.
Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when
available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must
be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit
is faulty.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.
Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the
external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the
energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck
function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse failure is needed.

10.1.7.6 Voltage selection

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers

for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines
the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions.
This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB
supervision.

219
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting is
also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.

From the voltage selection part, selected voltages, and functions conditions are
connected to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts
to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an
inverter for one of the positions.

10.1.7.7 Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select
between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and
the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other
combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively
indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the MCB
for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively
be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected in the selected
voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the
selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the function can
be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in
figure 99.

220
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN

Figure 99: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

10.1.7.8 Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for the
complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is
described.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
(Synchronism, Synchronizing and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit
breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is
connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the best selection of
voltage circuit.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

221
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and

with alternative Healthy or Failing MCB signals depending on what is available from
each MCB.

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If
a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This
output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output
as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function
block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 100
and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 101.

222
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd

IEC05000780 V2 EN

Figure 100: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement

223
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd

IEC05000781 V2 EN

Figure 101: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker
arrangement.

224
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.1.8 Technical data

Table 170: SESRSYN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline 0.500 - 2.000 -

Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -

Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit 0.03-0.50 p.u ± 0.5% of Ur
between bus and line for
synchronizing and
synchrocheck
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
synchrocheck
Frequency difference (0.003-0.250) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
minimum limit for
synchronizing
Frequency difference (0.050-0.500) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
maximum limit for
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
rate of change
Closing time of the breaker (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Breaker closing pulse (0.050-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
duration
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
synchronizing function if no
close has been made before
set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
synchronizing conditions
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
energizing check
Operate time for 40 ms typically -
synchrocheck function
Operate time for energizing 100 ms typically -
function

10.2 Autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC

225
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.2.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC 79

O->I

SYMBOL-L V1 EN

10.2.2 Functionality
The autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/
or delayed auto-reclosing for single breaker applications.

Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting.

The autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck

function.

10.2.3 Function block

SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
TRSOTF 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
THOLHOLD 3PT3
CBREADY 3PT4
CBPOS 3PT5
SYNC CLOSECB
WAIT WFMASTER
RSTCOUNT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR

IEC0800086_1_en.vsd
IEC08000086 V1 EN

Figure 102: SMBRREC function block

226
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.2.4 Signals
Table 171: SMBRREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches AR On when Operation = ExternalCtrl
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches AR Off when Operation = ExternalCtrl
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases AR from blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip
signal
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from
SOTF
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream
devices
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Holds AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow
start / close
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled for 3Ph closing
attempts
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master in Multi-breaker arrangements
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters

Table 172: SMBRREC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN AR is in blocked state
SETON BOOLEAN AR operation is switched on
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that AR is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the
reclaim time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open
time
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
CLOSECB BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
Table continues on next page

227
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential
reclosing
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
1
COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
2
COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot
5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots

10.2.5 Settings
Table 173: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - External ctrl Off / ExternalCtrl / On
External ctrl
On
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing
3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Minimum time that CB must be closed
before new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
Master

228
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Table 174: SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Maximum number of reclosing shots 1-5
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - - Off To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB
On open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - - NormOpen Select CB auxilary contact type NC/NO for
NormOpen CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - - CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal
OCO CO/OCO
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
Follow CB Off - - Off Advance to next shot if CB has been
On closed during dead time
AutoCont Off - - Off Continue with next reclosing-shot if
On breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by
CB check checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Off - - Off Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
On
ZoneSeqCoord Off - - Off Coordination of down stream devices to
On local protection unit’s AR

10.2.6 Operation principle

10.2.6.1 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a line
protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input.

For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met.

They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:

• CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
• CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start
was applied
• No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.

229
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “Started” is set.
It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.

To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,

one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and
set a parameter StartByCBOpen = On and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to
input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 103. The following should be considered:

• Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or On. External ctrl offers the
possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs, and so on.
• SMBRREC is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and
CBREADY.

Operation:On

Operation:Off

Operation:External Ctrl
OR
ON AND SETON
AND S
OR
OFF AND R

START

OR initiate
autoInitiate

Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND

start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS CB Closed
t R

AND
Blocking conditions READY
AND
OR
Inhibit condistions

count 0

en08000017.vsd

IEC08000017 V1 EN

Figure 103: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

230
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.2.6.2 Control of the auto-reclosing open time

There are settings for three-phase auto-reclosing open time, t1 3Ph to t5 3Ph.

10.2.6.3 Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. A long trip signal interrupts the
reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are
exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-
phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to
use a synchro-check function in the same physical device or an external one. The
release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC.
If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set
high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-check function to a
permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check, the signal
passes on.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the

readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing
command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready
for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the
tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was
however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is
prepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which
the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as
a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing
command is given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.

231
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

"SMBRREC Open
time" timer
From logic for t1 3Ph
reclosing t
3PT1TO
programs

3PT1TO
3PT2TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO Pulse
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate AND Blocking out
CBREADY AND OR

SMBRREC
tSync State Control
AND t
COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
tReclaim
Pulse (above) AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
LOGIC Reclaim Timer On
reclosing
programs
start
initiate INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
3PT5

Blocking out tInhibit

OR Inhibit (internal)
INHIBIT t

IEC08000244-2-en.vsd

IEC08000244 V2 EN

Figure 104: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The duration of the pulse is fixed 200 ms. See figure 105

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is

incremented. There is a counter for each reclosing shot and one for the total number
of reclosing commands issued.

232
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

pulse
CLOSECB
initiate AND

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

en08000245.vsd

IEC08000245 V1 EN

Figure 105: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START or
TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The
timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the
number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will
be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the
CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because
of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the
last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can also be
made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then
be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond
to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL
is set high after time tUnsucCl.

233
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0
R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse SMBRREC
(Closing) OR tUnsucCl
AND
AND t
CBPOS CBclosed

IEC09000203_1_en.vsd
IEC09000203 V1 EN

Figure 106: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing
shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection
functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter
AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed
without a new start.

tAutoContWait
t

AND

CLOSECB
AND S Q

AND

CBPOS CBClosed
OR

initiate
START OR

en05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V1 EN

Figure 107: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Start of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply starting of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of
from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode
is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block
reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType =

234
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed) to

inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an
auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function,
subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs
to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent
reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

StartByCBOpen = On
1

START AND

start
³1
100 ms
AND

100 ms

en08000078.vsd
IEC08000078 V1 EN

Figure 108: Pulsing of the start inputs

10.2.7 Technical data

Table 175: SMBRREC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 3Ph (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

shot 2 - t2 3Ph (0.00-6000.00) s

shot 3 - t3 3Ph
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s
Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR (0.00-6000.00) s
becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command before (0.000-60.000) s
proceeding to next shot

235
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.3 Apparatus control

10.3.1 Functionality
The apparatus control function APC8 for up to 8 apparatuses is used for control and
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay.
Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such
as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal
blockings.

In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not
supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the
resulting position is supervised.

The switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select
and operate switching primary apparatuses. Each of the 8 switch controllers SCSWI
may handle and operate on one three-phase apparatus.

Each of the 3 circuit breaker controllers SXCBR provides the actual position status
and pass the commands to the primary circuit breaker and supervises the switching
operation and positions.

Each of the 7 circuit switch controllers SXSWI provides the actual position status and
pass the commands to the primary disconnectors and earthing switches and supervises
the switching operation and positions.

10.3.2 Switch controller SCSWI

10.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Switch controller SCSWI - -

10.3.2.2 Functionality

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device.

236
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.3.2.3 Function block

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SELECTED
L_OPEN START_SY
L_CLOSE POSITION
AU_OPEN OPENPOS
AU_CLOSE CLOSEPOS
BL_CMD CMD_BLK
RES_EXT L_CAUSE
SY_INPRO POS_INTR
SYNC_OK XOUT
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS*

IEC09000087_1_en.vsd

IEC09000087 V1 EN

Figure 109: SCSWI function block

10.3.2.4 Signals
Table 176: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOS GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI
SIGNAL

Table 177: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
Table continues on next page

237
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

10.3.2.5 Settings
Table 178: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination

10.3.3 Circuit breaker SXCBR

10.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker SXCBR - -

10.3.3.2 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise
the switching operation and position.

238
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.3.3.3 Function block

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
TR_OPEN CLOSEPOS
TR_CLOSE TR_POS
RS_CNT CNT_VAL
XIN L_CAUSE

IEC09000089_1_en.vsd

IEC09000089 V1 EN

Figure 110: SXCBR function block

10.3.3.4 Signals
Table 179: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 180: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
Table continues on next page

239
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command

10.3.3.5 Settings
Table 181: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate

10.3.4 Circuit switch SXSWI

10.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit switch SXSWI - -

10.3.4.2 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

240
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.3.4.3 Function block

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
TR_OPEN CLOSEPOS
TR_CLOSE TR_POS
RS_CNT CNT_VAL
XIN L_CAUSE

IEC09000092_1_en.vsd

IEC09000092 V1 EN

Figure 111: SXSWI function block

10.3.4.4 Signals
Table 182: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 183: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
Table continues on next page

241
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command

10.3.4.5 Settings
Table 184: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate

10.3.5 Bay control QCBAY

10.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Bay control QCBAY - -

10.3.5.2 Functionality

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY
also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within
the bay.

242
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.3.5.3 Function block

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD REM
BL_CMD

IEC09000080_1_en.vsd

IEC09000080 V1 EN

Figure 112: QCBAY function block

10.3.5.4 Signals
Table 185: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

Table 186: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

10.3.5.5 Settings
Table 187: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Priority of originators
No priority

243
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.3.6 Local remote LOCREM

10.3.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local remote LOCREM - -

10.3.6.2 Functionality

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.

10.3.6.3 Function block

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC09000076_1_en.vsd

IEC09000076 V1 EN

Figure 113: LOCREM function block

10.3.6.4 Signals
Table 188: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

Table 189: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

244
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.3.6.5 Settings
Table 190: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch

10.3.7 Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

10.3.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL - -

10.3.7.2 Functionality

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.

10.3.7.3 Function block

LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 ^HMICTR1
^PSTO2 ^HMICTR2
^PSTO3 ^HMICTR3
^PSTO4 ^HMICTR4
^PSTO5 ^HMICTR5
^PSTO6 ^HMICTR6
^PSTO7 ^HMICTR7
^PSTO8 ^HMICTR8
^PSTO9 ^HMICTR9
^PSTO10 ^HMICTR10
^PSTO11 ^HMICTR11
^PSTO12 ^HMICTR12

IEC09000074_1_en.vsd
IEC09000074 V1 EN

Figure 114: LOCREMCTRL function block

245
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.3.7.4 Signals
Table 191: LOCREMCTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

Table 192: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

10.3.7.5 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

246
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.3.8 Select release SELGGIO

10.3.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Select release SELGGIO - -

10.3.8.2 Function block

SELGGIO
SELECT1 RESERVED
SELECT2
SELECT3
SELECT4
SELECT5
SELECT6
SELECT7
SELECT8
SELECT9
SELECT10
SELECT11
SELECT12
SELECT13
SELECT14
SELECT15
SELECT16

IEC09000084_1_en.vsd

IEC09000084 V1 EN

Figure 115: SELGGIO function block

10.3.8.3 Signals
Table 193: SELGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SELECT1 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 1
SELECT2 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 2
SELECT3 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 3
SELECT4 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4
SELECT5 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 5
SELECT6 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 6
SELECT7 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 7
SELECT8 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 8
SELECT9 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 9
SELECT10 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 10
SELECT11 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 11
SELECT12 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 12
SELECT13 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 13
SELECT14 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 14
SELECT15 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 15
SELECT16 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 16

247
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Table 194: SELGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
RESERVED BOOLEAN Reserved indication from bay/apparatus

10.3.8.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.3.9 Operation principle

10.3.9.1 Switch controller SCSWI

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The
involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation,
blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control
model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with
enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position
is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised
in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position.
Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the
command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command
sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated
variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850
communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and
used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent
independent of the position value.

248
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Evaluation of position
The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With
the group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality
attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error
the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary

inputs, e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent
commands over IEC 61850.

The different blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is
continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the
synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is
omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker
(SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will
send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
figure 116. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the

249
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-

synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 119.

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK

START_SY

SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

IEC09000209_1_en.vsd
IEC09000209 V1 EN

Figure 116: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd

IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 117: tSelect

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 118.

250
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

tExecutionFB t1>tExecutionFB, then

timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094.vsd

IEC05000094 V1 EN

Figure 118: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at
the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not
start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions
are not fulfilled.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd

IEC05000095 V1 EN

Figure 119: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

251
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence, the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 195 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to
these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 195: Values for "cause" signal in priority order
Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

10.3.9.2 Circuit breaker SXCBR

The users of the Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal
IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 120.

252
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 120: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators
place, protection functions, autoreclosure and so on.

The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary

inputs, e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent
commands over IEC 61850.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position for the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that
the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the
manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When

253
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating .

The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 121 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 121: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 122 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both
execute output pulses.

254
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 122: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in figure 123 .

255
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 123: Open command with open position indication

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 196 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to
these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 196: Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order
Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

10.3.9.3 Circuit switch SXSWI

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) is other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in
another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions

256
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command.

In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal
IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 124.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 124: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators
place, protection functions, autorecloser and so on.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

257
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position for the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the
real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually
entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating .
The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 125 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 125: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 126 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both
execute output pulses.

258
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 126: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in figure 127.

259
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 127: Open command with open position indication

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 197 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to
these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 197: Values for "cause" signal in priority order
Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

10.3.9.4 Bay control QCBAY

The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC
61850–8–1 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.

260
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level
and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection
IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are
connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately
from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select
this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If
the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set
to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 198. In addition, there is one setting parameter that affects
the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch
position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of
switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 198: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch PSTO value AllPSTOValid Possible locations that shall be able to
positions (setting parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 -- Not possible to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any
priority
2 = Remote 2 Priority Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any
priority
3 = Faulty 3 -- Not possible to operate

261
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850–8–1). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

10.3.9.5 Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/LOCREMCTRL

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 128, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used.
When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the
configuration. The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output
PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

262
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD REM
BL_ CMD

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC 09000208_1_en. vsd

IEC09000208 V2 EN

Figure 128: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with one
bay and one screen page

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

10.4 Interlocking

10.4.1 Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent
material damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED
is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the primary bus configuration and status of any
breaker or switch at any given time.

10.4.2 Logical node for interlocking SCILO

263
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

10.4.2.2 Functionality

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic and provides SCILO its
input.

10.4.2.3 Function block

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

IEC09000083.vsd

IEC09000083 V1 EN

Figure 129: SCILO function block

10.4.2.4 Logic diagram

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch being controlled
has its position defined as open (via POSOPEN) for example, then the appropriate
enable signal output (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The switch operation enable
signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the
intermediate and bad position state of the switch (defined via POSOPEN and
POSCLOSE) and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs
come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the
enable signals , OPEN_EN and CLOSE_EN come from the interlocking logic. The
outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance
per switching device is needed.

264
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN

Figure 130: SCILO function logic diagram

10.4.2.5 Signals
Table 199: SCILO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 200: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad
position is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or intermediate or bad
position is enabled

10.4.2.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.3 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES

10.4.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3

265
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.3.2 Functionality

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar
earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 131.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN

Figure 131: Switchyard layout BB_ES

10.4.3.3 Function block

BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

IEC09000071_1_en.vsd

IEC09000071 V1 EN

Figure 132: BB_ES function block

10.4.3.4 Logic diagram

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN

10.4.3.5 Signals
Table 201: BB_ES Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are
valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing all
disconnectors on this busbar part

266
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Table 202: BB_ES Output signals

Name Type Description
QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

10.4.3.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.4 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS

10.4.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

10.4.4.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 133. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN

Figure 133: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

267
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.4.3 Function block

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC09000066_1_en.vsd

IEC09000066 V1 EN

Figure 134: A1A2_BS function block

10.4.4.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN

268
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN

10.4.4.5 Signals
Table 203: A1A2_BS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the
busbar transfer
Table continues on next page

269
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Default Description

EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay connected to
busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays containing
earthing switches QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 204: A1A2_BS Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1
and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and
2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1
and 2 are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

270
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.4.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC

10.4.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

10.4.5.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 135. A1A2_DC
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN

Figure 135: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

271
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.5.3 Function block

A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

IEC09000067_1_en.vsd

IEC09000067 V1 EN

Figure 136: A1A2_DC function block

10.4.5.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN

10.4.5.5 Signals
Table 205: A1A2_DC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

272
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open
position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open
position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are
valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are
valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays containing
earthing switches QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays with
disconnectors connected to sections 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB

Table 206: A1A2_DC Output signals

Name Type Description
QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

10.4.5.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.6 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC

273
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

10.4.6.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 137. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN

Figure 137: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer
bus (WA7)C.

274
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.6.3 Function block

ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

IEC09000069_1_en.vsd

IEC09000069 V1 EN

Figure 138: ABC_BC function block

10.4.6.4 Logic diagram

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN

275
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN

276
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN

277
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.6.5 Signals
Table 207: ABC_BC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 Bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the
busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA1 and WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing
earthing switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay connected to
WA1/WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler
bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
Table continues on next page

278
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 208: ABC_BC Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
Table continues on next page

279
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or
closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA1 and WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA1 and WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA2 and WA7 are valid

10.4.6.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.7 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH

10.4.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3

280
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.7.2 Functionality

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,

BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 139.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN

Figure 139: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.

281
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.7.3 Function block

BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

IEC09000072_1_en.vsd

IEC09000072 V1 EN

Figure 140: BH_CONN function block

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC09000073_1_en.vsd

IEC09000073 V1 EN

Figure 141: BH_LINE_A function block

282
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC09000081_1_en.vsd

IEC09000081 V1 EN

Figure 142: BH_LINE_B function block

283
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.7.4 Logic diagrams

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN

284
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN

285
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN

286
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN

287
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN

288
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.7.5 Signals
Table 209: BH_CONN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62

Table 210: BH_LINE_A Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
Table continues on next page

289
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 211: BH_LINE_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

290
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

291
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Table 212: BH_CONN Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden

Table 213: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

292
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Table 214: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

10.4.7.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB

10.4.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

293
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.8.2 Functionality

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 143.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN

Figure 143: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the
disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the circuit
breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and earthing
switches of this section.

294
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.8.3 Function block

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

IEC09000077_1_en.vsd

IEC09000077 V1 EN

Figure 144: DB_BUS_A function block

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC09000078_1_en.vsd

IEC09000078 V1 EN

Figure 145: DB_BUS_B function block

DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

IEC09000082_1_en.vsd

IEC09000082 V1 EN

Figure 146: DB_LINE function block

295
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.8.4 Logic diagrams

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN

296
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN

297
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN

298
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN

10.4.8.5 Signals
Table 215: DB_BUS_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 216: DB_BUS_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

299
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 217: DB_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
Table continues on next page

300
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 218: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 219: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
Table continues on next page

301
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 220: DB_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden

10.4.8.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.9 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE

10.4.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

10.4.9.2 Functionality

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 147. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or
a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

302
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN

Figure 147: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer
bus (WA7)C.

303
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.9.3 Function block

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

IEC09000070_1_en.vsd

IEC09000070 V1 EN

Figure 148: ABC_LINE function block

304
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.9.4 Logic diagram

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd

IEC04000527 V1 EN

305
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

IEC04000528 V1 EN

306
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

IEC04000529 V1 EN

307
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN

308
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd

IEC04000531 V1 EN

309
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd

IEC04000532 V1 EN

10.4.9.5 Signals
Table 221: ABC_LINE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

310
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own
bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7
are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA1 and WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA1 and WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatus between WA2
and WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing
earthing switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay with
disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

311
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Table 222: ABC_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

10.4.9.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.10 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO

312
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

10.4.10.2 Functionality

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 149. The function
is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer.
Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This
function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN

Figure 149: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

313
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.10.3 Function block

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

IEC09000068_1_en.vsd

IEC09000068 V1 EN

Figure 150: AB_TRAFO function block

10.4.10.4 Logic diagram

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN

314
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN

315
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN

10.4.10.5 Signals
Table 223: AB_TRAFO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between
WA1 and WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing
earthing switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
Table continues on next page

316
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 224: AB_TRAFO Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

10.4.10.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

317
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.4.11 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

10.4.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

10.4.11.2 Functionality

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS
or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

10.4.11.3 Function block

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd

IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 151: POS_EVAL function block

10.4.11.4 Logic diagram

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

318
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.4.11.5 Signals
Table 225: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

Table 226: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

10.4.11.6 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.4.12 Operation principle

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the
interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This
can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that
might influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation
is maintained until the operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that may affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different
modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

319
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 152.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN

Figure 152: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 153 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN

Figure 153: Data exchange between interlocking modules

320
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board
error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for
execution of the function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing

switches are always identical.
• Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no
line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to
no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
• Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without
load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is,
the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation
is concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely
isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or
if they are earthed on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB
and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
• Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
• 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration

321
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these
specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in
TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

10.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGGIO

10.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGGIO - -
selection and LHMI presentation

10.5.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector
switches eliminate all these problems.

322
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.5.3 Function block

SLGGIO
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC09000091_1_en.vsd

IEC09000091 V1 EN

Figure 154: SLGGIO function block

10.5.4 Signals
Table 227: SLGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

Table 228: SLGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
Table continues on next page

323
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

Name Type Description

P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position as integer value

10.5.5 Settings
Table 229: SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Output time delay
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

324
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.5.6 Monitored data

Table 230: SLGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position as integer
value

10.5.7 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operates the
UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of
UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can block the function
operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be
kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is
specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE
from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has
also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions
and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the
menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.

10.6 Selector mini switch VSGGIO

10.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGGIO - -

325
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.6.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for
a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI.

10.6.3 Function block

VSGGIO
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC09000341-1-en.vsd
IEC09000341 V1 EN

10.6.4 Signals
Table 231: VSGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Table 232: VSGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

326
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.6.5 Settings
Table 233: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

10.6.6 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed
in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated

with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on
the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in
PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

327
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

10.7 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

DPGGIO

10.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O DPGGIO - -
functions

10.7.2 Functionality
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO function block is used
to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation using
IEC61850. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

10.7.3 Function block

DPGGIO
OPEN POSITION
CLOSE
VALID

IEC09000075_1_en.vsd

IEC09000075 V1 EN

Figure 155: DPGGIO function block

10.7.4 Signals
Table 234: DPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

Table 235: DPGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

328
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

10.7.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this
information.

10.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

10.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO - -

10.8.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE
(SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive
command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. The
commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

10.8.3 Function block

SPC8GGIO
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC09000086_1_en.vsd
IEC09000086 V1 EN

Figure 156: SPC8GGIO function block

329
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.8.4 Signals
Table 236: SPC8GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection

Table 237: SPC8GGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8

10.8.5 Settings
Table 238: SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
Latched1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 2 Pulse Time
Latched3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 5 Pulse Time
Latched6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 6 Pulse Time
Table continues on next page

330
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Latched7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 7 Pulse Time
Latched8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 8 pulse time

10.8.6 Operation principle

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the
eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected.
The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if
the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will
block the operation of the function – in case a command is sent, no output will be
activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.

10.9 Automation bits AUTOBITS

10.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

10.9.2 Functionality
The Automation bits function AUTOBITS is used to configure the DNP3 protocol
command handling. Each of the 3 AUTOBITS available has 32 individual outputs
available, each can be mapped as a binary output point in DNP3.

331
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.9.3 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000030-1-en.vsd
IEC09000030 V1 EN

Figure 157: AUTOBITS function block

10.9.4 Signals
Table 239: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

Table 240: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
Table continues on next page

332
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

10.9.5 Settings
Table 241: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

10.9.6 Operation principle

Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off,
pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were

333
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive

100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the
BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an
overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation
of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again,
momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The
command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local” then
no change is applied to the outputs.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to DNP3 communication

protocol manual.

10.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

10.10.1 Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of
restart.

10.10.2 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 158: I103CMD function block

10.10.3 Signals
Table 242: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 243: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential
protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

334
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

10.10.4 Settings
Table 244: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

10.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

10.11.1 Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.
All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 400ms.

10.11.2 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 159: I103IEDCMD function block

10.11.3 Signals
Table 245: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 246: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

335
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.11.4 Settings
Table 247: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

10.12 Function commands user defined for IEC

60870-5-103 I103USRCMD

10.12.1 Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output
signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

10.12.2 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 160: I103USRCMD function block

10.12.3 Signals
Table 248: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 249: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
Table continues on next page

336
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

10.12.4 Settings
Table 250: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

10.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

10.13.1 Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.
The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2

steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while
the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted
and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1. The
I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.

The standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to
a switching device, these values are transmitted.

337
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Control

10.13.2 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 161: I103GENCMD function block

10.13.3 Signals
Table 251: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

Table 252: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

10.13.4 Settings
Table 253: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)

10.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

10.14.1 Functionality
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position value
as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI function block)
and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). .The standard does not
define the use of values 0 and 3 . However, when connected to a switching device,
these values are transmitted.

338
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 10
Control

The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to
indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-operate
type of control)

10.14.2 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 162: I103POSCMD function block

10.14.3 Signals
Table 254: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

10.14.4 Settings
Table 255: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)

339
Technical manual
340
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Section 11 Logic

11.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN

11.1.2 Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved
in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a three-
phase trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct
co-operation with autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for breaker lock-
out.

11.1.3 Function block

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
TRIN CLLKOUT
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

IEC09000284_1_en.vsd
IEC09000284 V1 EN

Figure 163: SMPPTRC function block

341
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.1.4 Signals
Table 256: SMPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

Table 257: SMPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

11.1.5 Settings
Table 258: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal

Table 259: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Off - - Off On: Activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip
On latch, Off: Only output
AutoLock Off - - Off On: Lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and
On trip, Off: Only input

11.1.6 Operation principle

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure
the breaker opening.

For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single input
(TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the
IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs,
are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs
binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

342
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t

Operation Mode = On

Program = 3Ph

en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN

Figure 164: Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each

breaker.

Lockout can be activated either by activating the input (SETLKOUT) or

automatically from trip input by setting AutoLock to On. A Lockout condition will be
indicated by activation of the output (CLLKOUT). If lockout has been activated it can
be reset by activating the input (RSTLKOUT) or via the HMI.

If TripLockout is set to On an active Lockout will result in a three-phase trip output.

In this way if both AutoLock and TripLockout are set to On the trip will always be
three-phase and sealed in.

11.1.7 Technical data

Table 260: SMPPTRC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

11.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO

11.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO - -

11.2.2 Functionality
The 12 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function each with 32 inputs are used to route
trip signals and other logical output signals to the tripping logics SMPPTRC and
SPTPTRC or to different output contacts on the IED.

343
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

TMAGGIO 3 output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for
settable pulse or steady output.

11.2.3 Function block

TMAGGIO
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
IEC09000105 V1 EN

Figure 165: TMAGGIO function block

11.2.4 Signals
Table 261: TMAGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
Table continues on next page

344
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

Table 262: TMAGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

11.2.5 Settings
Table 263: TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
Table continues on next page

345
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 1, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

11.2.6 Operation principle

The trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value
1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay
is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The
ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an
drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by
PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are connected in an OR-
function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and
then one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will start when all
related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 166

346
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
Input 1
Output 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
Input 16

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed

Input 17
Output 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
Input 32

PulseTime
t
&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed

Output 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t

IEC09000612_2_en.vsd
IEC09000612 V2 EN

Figure 166: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

11.3 Configurable logic blocks

11.3.1 Standard configurable logic blocks

11.3.1.1 Functionality

A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.

• OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

• INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

347
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.

• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

• LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay and must be On for the input
signal to activate the output with the appropriate time delay.

• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. The SET input has priority if both SET and
RESET inputs are operated simultaneously.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. The RESET input has priority if both SET and
RESET are operated simultaneously.

Configurable logic Q/T

A number of logic blocks and timers, with the capability to propagate timestamp and
quality of the input signals, are available. The function blocks assist the user to adapt
the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

• ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

348
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to
the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to
the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The
timestamp of an output will be set to the latest timestamp of INPUT and VALID
inputs.

• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position

input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part
of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the corresponding quality part
of SP_OUT output.

• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. Value part
of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. Time part of single position
input is copied to TIME output. Quality bits in common part and indication part
of inputs signal is copied to the corresponding quality output.

11.3.1.2 OR function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
OR Function block OR - -

349
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Functionality
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs
is inverted.

Function block
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000288-1-en.vsd
IEC09000288 V1 EN

Figure 167: OR function block

Signals
Table 264: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 265: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Inverter function block INVERTER - -

350
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Function block
INVERTER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN

Figure 168: INVERTER function block

Signals
Table 266: INVERTER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 267: INVERTER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.4 PULSETIMER function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
PULSETIMER function block PULSETIMER - -

Functionality
The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.

Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN

Figure 169: PULSETIMER function block

351
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Signals
Table 268: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 269: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 270: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

11.3.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Controllable gate function block GATE - -

Functionality
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input
to the output or not, depending on setting.

Function block
GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN

Figure 170: GATE function block

Signals
Table 271: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

352
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Table 272: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 273: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

11.3.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Exclusive OR function block XOR - -

Functionality
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the
same.

Function block
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN

Figure 171: XOR function block

Signals
Table 274: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

353
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Table 275: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic loop delay function block LOOPDELAY - -

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.

Function block
LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT

IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 172: LOOPDELAY function block

Signals
Table 276: LOOPDELAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 277: LOOPDELAY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution
cycle

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

354
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.3.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Timer function block TIMERSET - -

Functionality
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to
the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN

Figure 173: TIMERSET Status diagram

Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN

Figure 174: TIMERSET function block

Signals
Table 278: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

355
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Table 279: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings
Table 280: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

11.3.1.9 AND function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AND function block AND - -

Functionality
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs.

Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just
use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT
has a default value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has
been put in the wrong execution order.

Function block
AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000289-1-en.vsd
IEC09000289 V1 EN

Figure 175: AND function block

356
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Signals
Table 281: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 282: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY - -

Functionality
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset
an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a
power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Set-
Reset flip-flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.
Table 283: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1

357
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Function block
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN

Figure 176: SRMEMORY function block

Signals
Table 284: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 285: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 286: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

11.3.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY - -

Functionality
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be
reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.

358
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Table 287: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

Function block
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 177: RSMEMORY function block

Signals
Table 288: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 289: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 290: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

359
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.3.2 Configurable logic Q/T

11.3.2.1 Functionality

A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp and
quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to adapt
the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

11.3.2.2 ORQT function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
ORQT function block ORQT - -

Functionality
ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

Function block
ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 178: ORQT function block

Signals
Table 291: ORQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

360
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Table 292: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.3 INVERTERQT function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
INVERTERQT function block INVERTERQT - -

Function block
INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 179: INVERTERQT function block

Signals
Table 293: INVERTERQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 294: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

361
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.3.2.4 Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT - -

Functionality
Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length
and will also propagate quality and time.

When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then return to 0.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

Function block
PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000304-1-en.vsd
IEC09000304 V1 EN

Figure 180: PULSETIMERQT function block

Signals
Table 295: PULSETIMERQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 296: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 297: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

362
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.3.2.5 XORQT function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
XORQT function block XORQT - -

Functionality
The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory
expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs.
One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different
and 0 if they are equal.

Function block
XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 181: XORQT function block

Signals
Table 298: XORQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

Table 299: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

363
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.3.2.6 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT - -

Functionality
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out delayed
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN

Figure 182: TIMERSETQT function

Function block
TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000303-1-en.vsd
IEC09000303 V1 EN

Figure 183: TIMERSETQT function block

Signals
Table 300: TIMERSETQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

364
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Table 301: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings
Table 302: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

11.3.2.7 ANDQT function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
ANDQT function block ANDQT - -

Functionality
ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just
use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT
has a default value 0 initially, which will suppress one cycle pulse if the function has
been put in the wrong execution order.

Function block
ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 184: ANDQT function block

365
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Signals
Table 303: ANDQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 304: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.8 Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Set/reset logic component SRMEMORYQT - -

Functionality
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop
after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

SRMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.

Table 305: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

366
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

Function block
SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000301-1-en.vsd
IEC09000301 V1 EN

Figure 185: SRMEMORYQT function block

Signals
Table 306: SRMEMORYQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 307: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 308: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

11.3.2.9 Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Reset/set logic component RSMEMORYQT - -

Functionality
The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or
set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has
two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after
a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

367
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Table 309: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

Function block
RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000302-1-en.vsd
IEC09000302 V1 EN

Figure 186: RSMEMORYQT function block

Signals
Table 310: RSMEMORYQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 311: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 312: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

11.3.2.10 INVALIDQT function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
INVALIDQT function block INVALIDQT - -

368
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Function block
INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC09000305-1-en.vsd
IEC09000305 V1 EN

Figure 187: INVALIDQT function block

Function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all
outputs invalid quality bit will be set. The timestamp of an output will be set to the
latest timestamp of INPUT and VALID input.

Signals
Table 313: INVALIDQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

369
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Table 314: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.11 Indication combining single position function block INDCOMBSPQT

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single indication signal combining INDCOMBSPQT - -
function block

Functionality
Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied
to time part of SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the corresponding state
part of SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT output changes, the Event
bit in the state part is toggled.

370
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Function block
INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*

IEC09000306-1-en.vsd
IEC09000306 V1 EN

Figure 188: INDCOMBSPQT function block

Signals
Table 315: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode

Table 316: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.12 Indication extractor single position function block INDEXTSPQT

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single indication signal extractor INDEXTSPQT - -
function block

Functionality
Value part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output.

371
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Time part of single position input is copied to TIME output.

State bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the
corresponding state output.

Function block
INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC09000307-1-en.vsd
IEC09000307 V1 EN

Figure 189: INDEXTSPQT function block

Signals
Table 317: INDEXTSPQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication

Table 318: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

372
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.3.3 Technical data

Table 319: Configurable logic blocks
Logic block Quantity Range or Accuracy
with cycle value
time
5 ms 20 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160 - -
OR 60 60 160 - -
XOR 10 10 20 - -
INVERTER 30 30 80 - -
SRMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
RSMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
GATE 10 10 20 - -
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for 20
90000.000) s ms cycle time
TIMERSET 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for 20
90000.000) s ms cycle time
LOOPDELAY 10 10 20

Table 320: Configurable logic Q/T

Logic block Quantity with Range or value Accuracy
cycle time
20 ms 100 ms
ANDQT 20 100 - -
ORQT 20 100 - -
XORQT 10 30 - -
INVERTERQT 20 100 - -
RSMEMORYQT 10 30 - -
SRMEMORYQT 15 10 - -
PULSETIMERQT 10 30 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for 20
90000.000) s ms cycle time
TIMERSETQT 10 30 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for 20
90000.000) s ms cycle time
INVALIDQT 6 6 - -
INDCOMBSPQT 10 10 - -
INDEXTSPQT 10 10 - -

373
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.4 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

11.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

11.4.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can
be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.

11.4.3 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN

Figure 190: FXDSIGN function block

11.4.4 Signals
Table 321: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

374
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.4.6 Operation principle

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

11.5 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I

11.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

11.5.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary
(logical) signals into an integer.

375
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.5.3 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000035-1-en.vsd

IEC09000035 V1 EN

Figure 191: B16I function block

11.5.4 Signals
Table 322: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 323: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

376
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.5.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

11.5.6 Monitored data

Table 324: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

11.5.7 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of
up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx
= 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available
on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated.
OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it
corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function
is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is
activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
Table continues on next page

377
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

11.6 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node

representation B16IFCVI

11.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with B16IFCVI - -
logic node representation

11.6.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function B16IFCVI
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input
will freeze the output at the last value.

378
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.6.3 Function block

B16IFCVI
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000624-1-en.vsd
IEC09000624 V1 EN

Figure 192: B16IFCVI function block

11.6.4 Signals
Table 325: B16IFCVI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

379
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

Table 326: B16IFCVI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

11.6.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

11.6.6 Monitored data

Table 327: B16IFCVI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

11.6.7 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(B16IFCVI) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16,
to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to
32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the
values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer
values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is
available on the output OUT. The B16IFCVI function is designed for receiving the
integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK
input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16IFCVI for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16IFCVI.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
Table continues on next page

380
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16IFCVI function block.

11.7 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

11.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A - -

11.7.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16A is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

11.7.3 Function block

IB16A
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000036-1-en.vsd

IEC09000036 V1 EN

Figure 193: IB16A function block

381
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.7.4 Signals
Table 328: IB16A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

Table 329: IB16A Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

11.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

11.7.6 Operation principle

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16A_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1,
OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of
these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.

382
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) will transfer an integer with
a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal
to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table
below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16A function is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical
outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16A for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block IB16A.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x
= 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16A function block.

383
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.8 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation IB16FCVB

11.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with IB16FCVB - -
logic node representation

11.8.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function IB16FCVB is
used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.

IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 when the operator
position input PSTO is in position remote. The block input will freeze the output at the
last value.

11.8.3 Function block

IB16FCVB
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000399-1-en.vsd
IEC09000399 V1 EN

Figure 194: IB16FCVB function block

11.8.4 Signals
Table 330: IB16FCVB Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

384
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

Table 331: IB16FCVB Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

11.8.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

11.8.6 Operation principle

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and
received by the IB16FCVB function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to
1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains
0. The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values of each of
the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these
OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC 61850 network. The
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 332. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx
= 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal
to the integer value received over IEC 61850 to the IB16FCVB_1 function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(IB16FCVB) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated
via IEC 61850 and connected to the IB16FCVB function block to a combination of

385
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values represented by the different OUTx
are according to Table 332. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

The IB16FCVB function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 332: Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16)
are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by
the IB16FCVB function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the IB16FCVB can only be written to the block while
the PSTO is in position “Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no
changes are applied to the outputs.

11.9 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGGIO

11.9.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGGIO - -

386
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

11.9.2 Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGGIO) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high.

The main features of TEIGGIO are

• Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds).

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and overflow.
• Possibility defining a warning or alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds.
• Retain the integration value at a warning/alarm/overflow.
• Possibilities for blocking and reset.
• Report the integrated time

11.9.3 Function block

TEIGGIO
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC13000005-1-en.vsd
IEC13000005 V1 EN

Figure 195: TEIGGIO function block

11.9.4 Signals

Table 333: TEIGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

Table 334: TEIGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

387
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.9.5 Settings

Table 335: TEIGGIO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 0-1 - 1 1 Operation Off / On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

11.9.6 Operation principle

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGGIO) provides

• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high.
• blocking and reset.
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow.
• retaining of the integrated value if any warning, alarm or overflow occurs.

Figure 196 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time
Integration“ covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
“Transgression Supervision Plus Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

Loop Delay

tOverflow
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-2-en.vsd

IEC12000195 V2 EN

Figure 196: TEIGGIO Simplified logic

TEIGGIO main functionalities are

• integrate the elapsed time when IN has been high

388
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 11
Logic

• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)

• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds to all tools
• integrated value is retained in non-volatile memory, if any warning, alarm
or overflow occurs
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow shall be available as the
initiation value for the integration followed by a restart.
• RESET: Reset the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the non-volatile memory to zero.
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request.
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME > tOverflow
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning.

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there
is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending
on the level of the defined values for the parameters.

tOverflow is for the overflow supervision with a default value tOverflow = 999 999.9
seconds. The outputs freeze if an overflow occurs.

11.9.6.1 Operation Accuracy

The accuracy of TEIGGIO depends on essentially three factors

• task cycle time
• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter task cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses
may lead to reduced accuracy.

11.9.6.2 Memory storage

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory, only if
any warning, alarm or/and overflow occurs. Consequently there is a risk of data loss
in the integrated time at a power failure.

389
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Logic

11.9.7 Technical data

Table 336: TEIGGIO Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time 5 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.05% or ±0.01 s
integration
20 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.05% or ±0.04 s
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.05% or ±0.2 s

390
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Section 12 Monitoring

12.1 Measurements

12.1.1 Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power
system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection
and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs. There are no interconnections regarding any settings or
parameters, neither between functions nor between signals within each function.

Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the
functions. For example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by ULZeroDb in
VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

391
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency

The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function
status/Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs

The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical

quantities:

• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component

quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

12.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN

12.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

392
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.1.2.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

IEC08000222.vsd

IEC08000222 V1 EN

Figure 197: CVMMXN function block

12.1.2.3 Signals
Table 337: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 338: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent power range
P_INST REAL Active power
P REAL Active power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive power
Q REAL Reactive power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive power range
PF REAL Power factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calcuated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
Table continues on next page

393
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

12.1.2.4 Settings
Table 339: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page

394
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 340: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

395
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of Ubase
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of Ibase
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5%
of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
Table continues on next page

396
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5%
of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

12.1.2.5 Monitored data

Table 341: CVMMXN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S REAL - MVA Apparent power
magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active power magnitude
of deadband value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
magnitude of deadband
value
PF REAL - - Power factor magnitude
of deadband value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage
magnitude of deadband
value
I REAL - A Calculated current
magnitude of deadband
value
F REAL - Hz System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value

12.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

12.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

397
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.1.3.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CMMXU
I3P IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

IEC08000225 V1 EN

Figure 198: CMMXU function block

12.1.3.3 Signals
Table 342: CMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

Table 343: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle
IL2 REAL IL2 Amplitude
IL2RANG INTEGER IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL REAL IL2 Angle
IL3 REAL IL3 Amplitude
IL3RANG INTEGER IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL REAL IL3 Angle

12.1.3.4 Settings
Table 344: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ILDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Table continues on next page

398
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ILMax 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
ILRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ILAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 345: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ILZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
ILHiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
ILHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
ILLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
ILLowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
ILMin 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
ILLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5%
of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

12.1.3.5 Monitored data

Table 346: CMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle
IL2 REAL - A IL2 Amplitude
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle
IL3 REAL - A IL3 Amplitude
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle

399
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU

12.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

12.1.4.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL

IEC08000223-2-en.vsd
IEC08000223 V2 EN

Figure 199: VMMXU function block

12.1.4.3 Signals
Table 347: VMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 348: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle
UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude
UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range
UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle
Table continues on next page

400
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Description

UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31Amplitude range
UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle

12.1.4.4 Settings
Table 349: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ULDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
ULMax 0 - 4000000 V 1 170000 Maximum value
ULRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ULAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 350: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ULZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
ULHiHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 160000 High High limit (physical value)
ULHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 150000 High limit (physical value)
ULLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 125000 Low limit (physical value)
ULLowLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 115000 Low Low limit (physical value)
ULMin 0 - 4000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
ULLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 V 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

12.1.4.5 Monitored data

Table 351: VMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle
UL23 REAL - kV UL23 Amplitude
UL23ANGL REAL - deg UL23 Angle
UL31 REAL - kV UL31 Amplitude
UL31ANGL REAL - deg UL31 Angle

401
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI

12.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current sequence component CMSQI -
measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

12.1.5.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC08000221-2-en.vsd
IEC08000221 V2 EN

Figure 200: CMSQI function block

12.1.5.3 Signals
Table 352: CMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

Table 353: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude
I1RANG INTEGER I1Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle
Table continues on next page

402
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I2 REAL I2 Amplitude
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2Angle

12.1.5.4 Settings
Table 354: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3I0Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
3I0Max 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 Maximum value
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I1Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I2Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

403
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Table 355: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3I0HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3600 High High limit (physical value)
3I0HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 High limit (physical value)
3I0LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
3I0LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I1HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I1HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I1LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I1LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I2HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I2HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I2LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I2LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

12.1.5.5 Monitored data

Table 356: CMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2Angle

12.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI

12.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI -

U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

404
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.1.6.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL

IEC08000224-2-en.vsd
IEC08000224 V2 EN

Figure 201: VMSQI function block

12.1.6.3 Signals
Table 357: VMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 358: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle

405
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.1.6.4 Settings
Table 359: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3U0Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
3U0Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 318000 Maximum value
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U1Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
U1Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
U2Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 360: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3U0HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 288000 High High limit (physical value)
3U0HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 258000 High limit (physical value)
3U0LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 213000 Low limit (physical value)
3U0LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 198000 Low Low limit (physical value)
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
Table continues on next page

406
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
U1HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
U1LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
U1LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
U2HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
U2HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
U2LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
U2LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)

12.1.6.5 Monitored data

Table 361: VMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle

12.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU

12.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

12.1.7.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

407
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL

IEC08000226-2-en.vsd
IEC08000226 V2 EN

Figure 202: VNMMXU function block

12.1.7.3 Signals
Table 362: VNMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 363: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2 REAL UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL2RANG INTEGER UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL REAL UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL3 REAL UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL3RANG INTEGER UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL REAL UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

12.1.7.4 Settings
Table 364: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UMax 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page

408
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

URepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ULimHys 0.000 - 100.000 V 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 365: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
UHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
ULowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
ULowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
UMin 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

12.1.7.5 Monitored data

Table 366: VNMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL2ANGL REAL - deg UL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL3ANGL REAL - deg UL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

12.1.8 Operation principle

12.1.8.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-

409
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends

on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in
local HMI under: Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service
values.

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2,
3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping
might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement values
within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 203. The monitoring
has two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 203.

410
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd

IEC05000657 V1 EN

Figure 203: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,
3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The
output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 203.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one
channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

411
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

IEC05000500 V1 EN

Figure 204: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change
is larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information
flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 205 shows an example with the amplitude dead-
band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

412
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1

99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN

Figure 205: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XDbRepInt), figure 206, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 206 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

413
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN

Figure 206: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

12.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the
available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a
parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 three phase-
EQUATION1385 V1 EN to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN available
2 Arone Used when
S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 three two
phase-to-
(Equation 40) phase
EQUATION1387 V1 EN
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
voltages are
EQUATION1388 V1 EN (Equation 41) available

3 PosSeq Used when

S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 42) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN (Equation 43) be measured

Table continues on next page

414
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 only UL1L2
phase-to-
(Equation 44)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1391 V1 EN

voltage is
EQUATION1392 V1 EN (Equation 45) available

5 L2L3 Used when

S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 only UL2L3
phase-to-
(Equation 46)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1393 V1 EN

voltage is
EQUATION1394 V1 EN (Equation 47) available

6 L3L1 Used when

S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 only UL3L1
phase-to-
(Equation 48)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1395 V1 EN

voltage is
EQUATION1396 V1 EN (Equation 49) available

7 L1 Used when
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 only UL1
phase-to-
(Equation 50) earth voltage
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1398 V1 EN (Equation 51)
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
(Equation 52) earth voltage
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1400 V1 EN (Equation 53)
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
(Equation 54) earth voltage
I = I L3
EQUATION1401 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1402 V1 EN (Equation 55)
* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the
P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 56)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 57)

415
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

S = S = P2 + Q2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 58)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 59)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging
behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor
is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 207.

416
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 207: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 60)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

417
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, the amplitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero.
When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the
measured values for power (P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well.
Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the CVMMXN
function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent
supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement
supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as amplitude
(setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality
CTStartPoint defines if the CTs earthing point is located towards or from the protected
object under observation. If everything is properly set power is always measured
towards protection object.

418
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Busbar

IED

P Q

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 208: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of
the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained
from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as
an output.

12.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-

phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal
use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle

419
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and

above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 207.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

12.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

12.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than
X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer
in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

12.1.9 Technical data

Table 367: CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Ur ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 0.5% of I at I > Ir

Active power, P 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Table continues on next page

420
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Apparent power, S 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Apparent power, S Three phase cos phi = 1 ± 0.5% of S at S > Sr

settings ± 0.5% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur < 0.02
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

12.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO

12.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event counter CNTGGIO -
S00946 V1 EN

12.2.2 Functionality
Event counter CNTGGIO has six counters which are used for storing the number of
times each counter input has been activated.

12.2.3 Function block

CNTGGIO
BLOCK VALUE1
COUNTER1 VALUE2
COUNTER2 VALUE3
COUNTER3 VALUE4
COUNTER4 VALUE5
COUNTER5 VALUE6
COUNTER6
RESET

IEC09000090_1_en.vsd

IEC09000090 V1 EN

Figure 209: CNTGGIO function block

12.2.4 Signals
Table 368: CNTGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COUNTER1 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 1
COUNTER2 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 2
COUNTER3 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 3
COUNTER4 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 4
Table continues on next page

421
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

COUNTER5 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 5
COUNTER6 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 6
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 369: CNTGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE1 INTEGER Output of counter 1
VALUE2 INTEGER Output of counter 2
VALUE3 INTEGER Output of counter 3
VALUE4 INTEGER Output of counter 4
VALUE5 INTEGER Output of counter 5
VALUE6 INTEGER Output of counter 6

12.2.5 Settings
Table 370: CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

12.2.6 Monitored data

Table 371: CNTGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE1 INTEGER - - Output of counter 1
VALUE2 INTEGER - - Output of counter 2
VALUE3 INTEGER - - Output of counter 3
VALUE4 INTEGER - - Output of counter 4
VALUE5 INTEGER - - Output of counter 5
VALUE6 INTEGER - - Output of counter 6

12.2.7 Operation principle

Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times
each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs
is updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an
input is activated.

To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This

422
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new
value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before
auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory
will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at
testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six
counters are set to 0.

All inputs are configured via PCM600.

12.2.7.1 Reporting

The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.

Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850
client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI
graphical display.

12.2.8 Technical data

Table 372: CNTGGIO technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-100000 -
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

12.3 Function description

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

12.3.1 Limit counter L4UFCNT

12.3.2 Introduction
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent limits
where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted
against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the
counted value reaches that limit.

423
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.3.3 Principle of operation

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if
the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four
limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated
until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash
memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

12.3.3.1 Design

Figure 210 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN

Figure 210: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:

• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 211.

424
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN

Figure 211: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input
and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition
remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are
applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial
states until the release of the block input.

12.3.3.2 Reporting

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement
on the local HMI graphical display.

12.3.4 Function block

L4UFCNT function block
L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN

425
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.3.5 Signals
Table 373: L4UFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 374: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value
settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than
MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

12.3.6 Settings
Table 375: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Set - - Set Select counting on positive and/or
Reset negative flanks
Both
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

426
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.3.7 Monitored data

Table 376: L4UFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

12.3.8 Technical data

Table 377: L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 5-160 pulses/s -

12.4 Disturbance report

12.4.1 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the
recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same
applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is

427
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be
uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

12.4.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

12.4.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -

12.4.2.2 Function block

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC09000346-1-en.vsd
IEC09000346 V1 EN

Figure 212: DRPRDRE function block

12.4.2.3 Signals
Table 378: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

12.4.2.4 Settings
Table 379: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
Table continues on next page

428
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

12.4.2.5 Monitored data

Table 380: DRPRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
Table continues on next page

429
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
Table continues on next page

430
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
Table continues on next page

431
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

12.4.3 Analog input signals AxRADR

12.4.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A1RADR - -
Analog input signals A2RADR - -
Analog input signals A3RADR - -

432
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.4.3.2 Function block

A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10

IEC09000348-1-en.vsd
IEC09000348 V1 EN

Figure 213: A1RADR function block, analog inputs, example for A1RADR,
A2RADR and A3RADR

12.4.3.3 Signals

A1RADR - A3RADR Input signals

Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for
GRPINPUT number.

• A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10

• A2RADR, GRPINPUT11 - GRPINPUT20
• A3RADR, GRPINPUT21 - GRPINPUT30

Table 381: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

433
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.4.3.4 Settings

A1RADR - A3RADR Settings

Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel
numbers.

• A1RADR, channel01 - channel10

• A2RADR, channel11 - channel20
• A3RADR, channel21 - channel30

Table 382: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation02 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation03 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation04 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation05 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation06 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation07 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation08 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation09 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation10 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 2
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 2
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 3
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 3
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 4
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 4
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

434
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 5
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 5
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 6
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 6
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 7
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 7
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 8
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 8
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 9
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 9
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 10
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel10
(IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 383: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 1
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 2
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
Table continues on next page

435
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 3 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 3
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in %
of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 4
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 5
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 6
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 7
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 8 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

436
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 8
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 9
On (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in
% of signal

12.4.4 Analog input signals A4RADR

12.4.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A4RADR - -

12.4.4.2 Function block

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC09000350-1-en.vsd
IEC09000350 V1 EN

Figure 214: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

437
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally
calculated analog signals.

12.4.4.3 Signals
Table 384: A4RADR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

12.4.4.4 Settings
Table 385: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation31 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation32 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation33 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation34 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation35 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation36 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation37 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation38 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation39 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation40 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
FunType31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 31
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

438
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 31
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 32
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 32
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 33
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 33
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 34
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 34
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 35
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 35
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 36
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 36
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 37
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 37
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 38
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 38
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 39
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 39
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 40
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel40
(IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 386: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 31 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 31
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

439
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 31 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 31 in
% of signal
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 32 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 32
in % of signal
OverTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 32 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32 in
% of signal
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 33 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
OverTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 33 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33 in
% of signal
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 34 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 34
in % of signal
OverTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 34 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 34 in
% of signal
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 35 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 35
in % of signal
OverTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 35 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 35 in
% of signal
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
UnderTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 36
in % of signal
OverTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 36 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

440
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 36 in
% of signal
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 37 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 37
in % of signal
OverTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 37 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37 in
% of signal
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 38 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38
in % of signal
OverTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 38 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 38 in
% of signal
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 39 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 39
in % of signal
OverTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 39 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 39 in
% of signal
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 40 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 40
in % of signal
OverTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 40 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 40 in
% of signal

441
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.4.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR

12.4.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary input signals B1RBDR - -
Binary input signals B2RBDR - -
Binary input signals B3RBDR - -
Binary input signals B4RBDR - -
Binary input signals B5RBDR - -
Binary input signals B6RBDR - -

12.4.5.2 Function block

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN

Figure 215: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B6RBDR

12.4.5.3 Signals

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signals

Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and
description number.

• B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16

• B2RBDR, INPUT17 - INPUT32
• B3RBDR, INPUT33 - INPUT48
• B4RBDR, INPUT49 - INPUT64
• B5RBDR, INPUT65 - INPUT80
• B6RBDR, INPUT81 - INPUT96

442
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Table 387: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

12.4.5.4 Settings

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Settings

Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and
description numbers.

• B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16

• B2RBDR, channel17 - channel32
• B3RBDR, channel33 - channel48
• B4RBDR, channel49 - channel64
• B5RBDR, channel65 - channel80
• B6RBDR, channel81 - channel96

Table 388: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR02 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

443
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED02 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR03 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED03 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR04 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED04 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR05 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED05 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR06 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED06 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR07 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED07 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR08 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED08 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR09 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED09 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR10 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED10 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

444
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR11 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED11 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR12 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED12 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR13 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED13 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR14 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED14 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR15 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED15 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR16 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED16 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

445
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)

446
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Table 389: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
Table continues on next page

447
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

12.4.6 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

Figure 216 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Event list , Event recorder and Indications uses information from the
binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog information
from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE
acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

448
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

A1-4RADR Disturbance Report

A4RADR DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000337-2-en.vsd
IEC09000337 V2 EN

Figure 216: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and
so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000161.vsd
IEC05000161 V1 EN

Figure 217: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 50 Hz
system it is possible to record 100 where the maximum recording time is 3.4 seconds.

449
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list, Event
recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

12.4.6.1 Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

12.4.6.2 Indications

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.

12.4.6.3 Event recorder

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see Event recorder section for detailed information.

12.4.6.4 Event list

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see Event list section for detailed information.

12.4.6.5 Trip value recorder

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault, see Trip value recorder section for detailed information.

450
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.4.6.6 Disturbance recorder

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.

12.4.6.7 Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

12.4.6.8 Recording times

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder, event recorder and indication function register disturbance data
and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which

criterion stops the current disturbance recording

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 218: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use
the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

451
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.4.6.9 Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (phase
differential currents, bias currents and so on).

SMAI A1RADR
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR
AI1NAME AI1 GRPINPUT1 A3RADR
External analog
AI2NAME AI2 GRPINPUT2
signals
AI3NAME AI3 GRPINPUT3
AI4NAME AI4 GRPINPUT4
AIN GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analog signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

en05000653-2.vsd
IEC05000653 V2 EN

Figure 219: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according
to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than
the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until
a new updated sample is available.

Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the

Disturbance report.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the

452
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the

SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used
as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

12.4.6.10 Binary signals

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow (START) and red (TRIP)
LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Off/Start/Trip/Start and Trip).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

12.4.6.11 Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance
of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

453
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

12.4.6.12 Post Retrigger

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,
during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start
until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig
occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a
new complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

454
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.4.7 Technical data

Table 390: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 1,0% of U at U > Ur

Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See time synchronization
technical data
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
recording time and maximum number 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

12.5 Indications

12.5.1 Functionality
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that
have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display
status information about the IED and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance recorder function that have changed status during a disturbance.

455
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.5.2 Function block

The Indications function has no function block of it’s own.

12.5.3 Signals

12.5.3.1 Input signals

The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report
function.

12.5.4 Operation principle

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED:

Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Red LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Indication list:

The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder.

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:

• the signal must be connected to binary input BxRBDR function block

• the DRPRDRE parameter Operation must be set On
• the DRPRDRE must be trigged (binary or analog)
• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the
binary inputs.

456
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-
defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
disturbance recorder function, indications and event recorder function.

12.5.5 Technical data

Table 391: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications 96
presented for single disturbance
Maximum number of recorded 100
disturbances

12.6 Event recorder

12.6.1 Functionality
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
recorder function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record

(Comtrade file).

12.6.2 Function block

The Event recorder has no function block of it’s own.

12.6.3 Signals

12.6.3.1 Input signals

The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.

12.6.4 Operation principle

When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be

457
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal

appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-
defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function , indications and event recorder function.

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed
via the local HMI or PCM600.

Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing
the IED simultaneously.

12.6.5 Technical data

Table 392: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance 150
report
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing

12.7 Event list

12.7.1 Functionality
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.

12.7.2 Function block

The Event list has no function block of it’s own.

458
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.7.3 Signals

12.7.3.1 Input signals

The Event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance
report function.

12.7.4 Operation principle

When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the
event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological
order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and
binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new
event arrives.

The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
local HMI.

The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,
which is only active during a disturbance.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined
name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance
recorder function , indications and the event recorder function .

The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information .

12.7.5 Technical data

Table 393: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing

12.8 Trip value recorder

12.8.1 Functionality
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.

459
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude and phase
angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).

12.8.2 Function block

The Trip value recorder has no function block of it’s own.

12.8.3 Signals

12.8.3.1 Input signals

The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to
A3RADR (not A4RADR).

12.8.4 Operation principle

Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well
as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter
ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.

When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest
number.

When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-
fault and fault values.

The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the
user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
Disturbance recorder function .

460
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information
(LMBRFLO) and managed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.

12.8.5 Technical data

Table 394: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

12.9 Disturbance recorder

12.9.1 Functionality
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for
example corrective actions) and long perspective (for example functional analysis).

The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 96
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection
functions. Up to 9,9 seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the
disturbance file.

The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED
and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.

12.9.2 Function block

The Disturbance recorder has no function block of it’s own.

12.9.3 Signals
See Disturbance report for input and output signals.

12.9.4 Settings
See Disturbance report for settings.

461
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.9.5 Operation principle

Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The
binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM) through the Signal Matrix
Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some
internally derived analog signals.

Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a

cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data
will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size
of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the
data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as
the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault
time and it can be set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from
analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

12.9.5.1 Memory and storage

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

462
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions. The
Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-
friendly way.

General:

• Station name, object name and unit name

• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
• Record number
• Sampling rate
• Time synchronization source
• Recording times
• Activated trig signal
• Active setting group

Analog:

• Signal names for selected analog channels

• Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
• CT direction

Binary:

• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret

the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,
channel info etc.

The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence
number and time stamp for each set of samples.

463
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.9.6 Technical data

Table 395: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 96
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of 340 seconds (100
channels, typical value) recordings) at 50 Hz
280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

12.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

SPGGIO

12.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O SPGGIO - -
functions

12.10.2 Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

12.10.3 Function block

SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN

IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN

Figure 220: SPGGIO function block

12.10.4 Signals
Table 396: SPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

464
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.10.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.10.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

12.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16

inputs SP16GGIO

12.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O SP16GGIO - -
functions 16 inputs

12.11.2 Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO function is
used to send up to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.

12.11.3 Function block

SP16GGIO
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC09000238_en_1.vsd
IEC09000238 V1 EN

Figure 221: SP16GGIO function block

465
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.11.4 Signals
Table 397: SP16GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

12.11.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.11.6 MonitoredData
Table 398: SP16GGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

466
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR
SIGNAL gate for input 1 to 16

12.11.7 Operation principle

Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must
use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which function block
in which equipment or system should receive this information.

There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an
OR type output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in
PST.

12.12 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

MVGGIO

12.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC61850 generic communication I/O MVGGIO - -
functions

467
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.12.2 Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

12.12.3 Function block

MVGGIO
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC09000239-2-en.vsd

12.12.4 Signals
Table 399: MVGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

Table 400: MVGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

12.12.5 Settings
Table 401: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
Table continues on next page

468
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

12.12.6 Monitored data

Table 402: MVGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

12.12.7 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as
output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC
61850 clients in the substation.

12.13 Measured value expander block MVEXP

12.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block MVEXP - -

469
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.13.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block MVEXP has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals:
below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high
limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.

12.13.3 Function block

MVEXP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN

Figure 222: MVEXP function block

12.13.4 Signals

Table 403: MVEXP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Table 404: MVEXP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

12.13.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

470
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (UBase) and (SBase).

12.13.6 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 405.
Table 405: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

12.14 Fault locator LMBRFLO

12.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

12.14.2 Functionality
The Fault locator LMBRFLO in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
great accuracy. It indicates the distance to fault in kilometers or miles as selected by
parameter setting.

The fault locator LMBRFLO function, supports kilometer and mile

for the line length unit. The fault distance will be presented with the
same unit as the line length and is mapped to IEC61850 -8-1
communication protocol, where the fault distance is supposed to be in
kilometer (km). Select the line length unit to kilometer for compliance
with IEC61850.

471
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault
km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for
load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up to
35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator.

12.14.3 Function block

LMBRFLO
PHSELL1* CALCMADE
PHSELL2* FLTDISTX
PHSELL3* BCD_80
CALCDIST* BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

IEC09000621-2-en.vsd

IEC09000621 V2 EN

Figure 223: LMBRFLO function block

12.14.4 Signals
Table 406: LMBRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)

472
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Table 407: LMBRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

12.14.5 Settings
Table 408: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Table 409: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording residual
current, IN
Table continues on next page

473
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on
parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL3

12.14.6 Monitored data

Table 410: LMBRFLO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line
length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 0=--- - Fault loop
1=L1-N
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=L1-L2-L3

12.14.7 Operation principle

The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
high accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault
locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog
configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within
PCM600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.

474
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO IEC09000726_1_en.vsd
IEC09000726 V1 EN

Figure 224: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order,
and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the
distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. It’s also
possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be
achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. LineLengthUnit setting is used to
select the unit of length either, in kilometer or miles for the distance to fault. Line
length unit can also be configured using PCM600. The fault location is stored as a part
of the disturbance report information and managed via the LHMI or PCM600.

12.14.7.1 Measuring Principle

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done,
the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

12.14.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 225 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from
both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a
distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the
algorithm.

475
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN

Figure 225: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 225 it is evident that:

U A = I A × p × Z L + IF × R F
EQUATION95 V1 EN (Equation 61)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN (Equation 62)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN (Equation 63)

476
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z L + -------
- × RF
DA
EQUATION98 V1 EN (Equation 64)

Table 411: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- ´ D ( I L 1 A – I 0A )
2
EQUATION110 V1 EN

L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L2A – I 0A )
2
EQUATION111 V1 EN

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA 3

--- ´ D ( I L3A – I0A )
2
EQUATION112 V1 EN

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A

DIL 1 L 2 A
N
EQUATION113 V1 EN

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A DIL2L3A

EQUATION114 V1 EN

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A
EQUATION115 V1 EN

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal
to:

Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN (Equation 65)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

477
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z 1L + -------- × RF + I 0P × Z 0M
DA
EQUATION100 V1 EN (Equation 66)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - × -------
- + ----------------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN (Equation 67)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 64 or 66 is a function of p,

the general equation 66 can be written in the form:
2
p – p × K1 + K2 – K3 × RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN (Equation 68)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A × ZL Z L + ZA DD

EQUATION104 V1 EN (Equation 69)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
IA × Z L Z L + Z A DD

EQUATION105 V1 EN (Equation 70)

I F A æ Z A + ZB
- × --------------------------- + 1ö
K 3 = ---------------
I A × Z L è Z 1 + ZA DD ø
EQUATION106 V1 EN (Equation 71)

478
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

and:

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to equation 67.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 68 applies to both single and
parallel lines.

Equation 68 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p – p × Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F × Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN (Equation 72)

– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN (Equation 73)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 73, and
then inserted to equation 72. According to equation 72, the relative distance to the fault
is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 72 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal
figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be
selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.

12.14.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault
current:

U A = p × Z 1 L × IA + R F × IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN (Equation 74)

Where:
IA is according to table 411.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only
used if the load compensated models do not function.

479
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.14.8 Technical data

Table 412: LMBRFLO technical data
Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
± 2.0% degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

12.15 Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT

12.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT U<> -

12.15.2 Function block

GUID-2D3C21EA-75E9-4E44-AA0F-4DEA7599182A V1 EN

Figure 226: Function block

12.15.3 Functionality
The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery
terminal voltage.

SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage
exceeds the set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the
overvoltage and undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time
characteristics.

SPVNZBAT operates after a settable operate time and resets when the battery
undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears after settable reset time.

480
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.15.4 Signals
Table 413: SPVNZBAT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_BATT REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function

Table 414: SPVNZBAT Output signals

Name Type Description
AL_ULOW BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has been below low limit for a
set time
AL_UHI BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has exceeded high limit for a
set time
ST_ULOW BOOLEAN Start signal when battery voltage drops below
lower limit
ST_UHI BOOLEAN Start signal when battery voltage exceeds upper
limit

12.15.5 Settings
Table 415: SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation mode Off / On
On
RtdBattVolt 20.00 - 250.00 V 1.00 110.00 Battery rated voltage
BattVoltLowLim 60 - 140 %Ubat 1 70 Lower limit for the battery terminal voltage
BattVoltHiLim 60 - 140 %Ubat 1 120 Upper limit for the battery terminal voltage
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for alarm
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of alarm

12.15.6 Measured values

Table 416: SPVNZBAT Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_BATT REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function

481
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.15.7 Monitored Data

Table 417: SPVNZBAT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BATTVOLT REAL - kV Service value of the
battery terminal voltage

12.15.8 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The function execution requires that at least one of the function

outputs is connected in configuration.

The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-9ACD1EE5-61C1-4CB8-9AF0-6F43292FC547 V2 EN

Figure 227: Functional module diagram

The battery rated voltage is set with the RtdBattVolt setting. The value of the
BattVoltLowLim and BattVoltHiLim settings are given in relative per unit to the
RtdBattVolt setting.

It is possible to block the function outputs by the BLOCK input.

Low level detector

The level detector compares the battery voltage U_BATT with the set value of the
BattVoltLowLim setting. If the value of the U_BATT input drops below the set value
of the BattVoltLowLim setting, the start signal ST_ULOW is activated.

The measured voltage between the battery terminals U_BATT is available through the
Monitored data view.

482
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

High level detector

The level detector compares the battery voltage U_BATT with the set value of the
BattVoltHiLim setting. If the value of the U_BATT input exceeds the set value of the
BattVoltHiLim setting, the start signal ST_UHI is activated.

Time delay
When the operate timer has reached the value set by the tDelay setting, the AL_ULOW
and AL_UHI outputs are activated. If the voltage returns to the normal value before
the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by tReset, the operate timer resets and the ST_ULOW and ST_UHI outputs are
deactivated.

12.15.9 Technical data

Table 418: SPVNZBAT Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Lower limit for the battery (60-140) % of Ubat ± 1.0% of set battery voltage
terminal voltage
Reset ratio, lower limit <105 % -
Upper limit for the battery (60-140) % of Ubat ± 1.0% of set battery voltage
terminal voltage
Reset ratio, upper limit >95 % -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
Battery rated voltage 20-250V -

12.16 Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG

12.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

12.16.2 Functionality
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used
as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.

483
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.16.3 Function block

SSIMG
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN

Figure 228: SSIMG function block

12.16.4 Signals

Inputs PRESSURE and TEMP together with settings PressAlmLimit,

PressLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported
in this release of 650 series.

Table 419: SSIMG Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

Table 420: SSIMG Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

484
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.16.5 Settings
Table 421: SSIMG Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

12.16.6 Operation principle

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG is used to monitor gas pressure in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, pressure below alarm level and pressure below lockout level. If the
input signal PRES_ALM is high, which indicate that the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker is below alarm level, the function initiates output signal PRES_ALM,
pressure below alarm level, after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the
circuit breaker is required. Similarly, if the input signal PRES_LO is high, which
indicate gas pressure in the circuit breaker is below lockout level, the function initiates
output signal PRES_LO, after a time delay. The two time delay settings,
tPressureAlarm and tPressureLO, are included in order not to initiate any alarm for
short sudden changes in the gas pressure. If the gas pressure in the circuit breaker goes
below the levels for more than the set time delays the corresponding signals,
PRES_ALM, pressure below alarm level and PRES_LO, pressure below lockout level
alarm will be obtained.

The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms levels. The input signal
BLOCK is used to block both the alarms and the function.

12.16.7 Technical data

Table 422: SSIMG Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

485
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.17 Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML

12.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

12.17.2 Functionality
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.

12.17.3 Function block

SSIML
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN

Figure 229: SSIML function block

12.17.4 Signals

Inputs LEVEL and TEMP together with settings LevelAlmLimit,

LevelLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported
in this release of 650 series.

Table 423: SSIML Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
Table continues on next page

486
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

Table 424: SSIML Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

12.17.5 Settings
Table 425: SSIML Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

12.17.6 Operation principle

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML is used to monitor oil level in the circuit
breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate alarm
signals, level below alarm level and level below lockout level. If the input signal
LVL_ALM is high, which indicate that the oil level in the circuit breaker is below
alarm level, the output signal LVL_ALM, level below alarm level, will be initiated

487
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is required.
Similarly, if the input signal LVL_LO is high, which indicate oil level in the circuit
breaker is below lockout level, the output signal LVL_LO, will be initiated after a time
delay. The two time delay settings, tLevelAlarm and tLevelLockOut, are included in
order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in the oil level. If the oil level
in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for more than the set time delays the
corresponding signals, LVL_ALM, level below alarm level and LVL_LO, level
below lockout level alarm will be obtained.

The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms levels. The input signal
BLOCK is used to block both the alarms and the function.

12.17.7 Technical data

Table 426: SSIMLTechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

12.18 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

12.18.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR - -

12.18.2 Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different
parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number
of operations has reached a predefined value. The energy is calculated from the
measured input currents as a sum of Iyt values. Alarms are generated when the
calculated values exceed the threshold settings.

The function contains a block alarm functionality.

The supervised and presented breaker functions include

• breaker open and close travel time
• spring charging time
• number of breaker operations
• accumulated IYt per phase with alarm and lockout
• remaining breaker life per phase
• breaker inactivity

488
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.18.3 Function block

GUID-365D67A9-BEF8-4351-A828-ED650D5A2CAD V1 EN

Figure 230: SSCBR function block

12.18.4 Signals
Table 427: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
ALMPRES BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure alarm input
LOPRES BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure input for lockout indication
SPRCHRGN BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started input
SPRCHRGD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged input
CBCNTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB remaining life and operation
counter
IACCRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated currents power
SPCHTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset spring charge time
TRVTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset travel time

Table 428: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRVTOAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
SPRCHRAL BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
OPRALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPRLOALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
Table continues on next page

489
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Name Type Description

IACCALM BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded alarm
limit
IACCLOAL BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded
lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB exceeded alarm limit
NOOPRALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
CBOPEN BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CBINVPOS BOOLEAN CB is in intermediate position
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN CB is in closed position

12.18.5 Settings
Table 429: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
AccDisLevel 5.00 - 500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which energy
accumulation stops
CurrExp 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy
calculation
RatedFaultCurr 500.00 - 75000.00 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
RatedOpCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
AccCurrAlmLvl 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Setting of alarm level for accumulated
currents power
AccCurrLO 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout limit setting for accumulated
currents power
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
LifeAlmLevel 0 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
OpNumRatCurr 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
OpNumFaultCurr 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
OpNumAlm 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm limit for number of operations
OpNumLO 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout limit for number of operations
tOpenAlm 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time
tCloseAlm 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for close travel time
OpenTimeCorr 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time
DifTimeCorr -10 - 10 ms 1 5 Correction factor for time difference in
auxiliary and main contacts open time
Table continues on next page

490
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tSprngChrgAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Setting of alarm for spring charging time
tPressAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
TPressLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
AccEnerInitVal 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Accumulation energy initial value
CountInitVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Operation numbers counter initialization
value
CBRemLife 0 - 9999 - 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life
estimates
InactDayAlm 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days
counter
InactDayInit 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days counter
InactHourAlm 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days counter in
hours

12.18.6 Monitored data

Table 430: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CBOTRVT REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
CBCLTRVT REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
SPRCHRT REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring
NO_OPR INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
NOOPRDAY INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
CBLIFEL1 INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase
L1
CBLIFEL2 INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase
L2
CBLIFEL3 INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase
L3
IACCL1 REAL - - Accumulated currents
power (Iyt), phase L1
IACCL2 REAL - - Accumulated currents
power (Iyt), phase L2
IACCL3 REAL - - Accumulated currents
power (Iyt), phase L3

12.18.7 Operation principle

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes a number of metering and
monitoring subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the

491
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The
operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to “Off”.

The operation of the functions can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-FE21BBDC-57A6-425C-B22B-8E646C1BD932 V1 EN

Figure 231: Functional module diagram

492
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.18.7.1 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that
is, whether the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position. The operation of
the breaker status monitoring can be described using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-60ADC120-4B5A-40D8-B1C5-475E4634214B V1 EN

Figure 232: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
BLOCK and BLK_ALM inputs

Phase current check

This module compares the three phase currents with the setting AccDisLevel. If the
current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about phase is reported to the
contact position indicator module.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the current is zero. The circuit breaker is closed when the
POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the
intermediate position if both the auxiliary contacts have the same value, that is, both
are in the logical level "0" or "1", or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high, but the current is not zero.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs CBOPEN, CBINVPOS
and CBCLOSED for open, error state and closed position respectively.

12.18.7.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if

the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time.

The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

493
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

GUID-82C88B52-1812-477F-8B1A-3011A300547A V1 EN

Figure 233: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm
for circuit breaker operation monitoring

Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive,
that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by
monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The inactive days NOOPRDAY is available through the Monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days by using the InactDayInit parameter.

Alarm limit check

When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the InactDayAlm setting,
the NOOPRALM alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is activated
can be set with the InactHourAlm parameter as coordinates of UTC. The alarm signal
NOOPRALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.

12.18.7.3 Breaker contact travel time

The breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time for
the closing and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-4D82C157-53AF-40C9-861C-CF131B49072B V1 EN

Figure 234: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time

Travelling time calculator

The breaker contact travel time is calculated from the time between auxiliary contacts'
state change. The open travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact.

494
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact
and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.

GUID-3AD25F5A-639A-4941-AA61-E69FA2357AFE V1 EN

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between
the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, in order to incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor
needs to be added with tOpen to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with
the OpenTimeCorr (=t1+t2). The closing time is calculated by adding the value set
with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time tTravelOpen and the closing travel time
tTravelClose are available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or
through tools via communications.

Alarm limit check

When the measured open travel time is longer than the value set with the tOpenAlm
setting, the TRVTOAL output is activated. Respectively, when the measured close
travel time is longer than the value set with the tCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCAL
output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCAL and TRVTOAL alarm signals by activating
the BLOCK input.

12.18.7.4 Operation counter

The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles.
Both open and close operations are included in one operation cycle. The operation
counter value is updated after each open operation.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

495
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

GUID-FF1221A4-6160-4F92-9E7F-A412875B69E1 V1 EN

Figure 235: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of
the binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NO_OPR is available through the Monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the CountInitVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the clear menu from LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The OPRALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the
value set with the OpNumAlm threshold setting. However, if the number of operations
increases further and exceeds the limit value set with the OpNumLO setting, the
OPRLOALM output is activated.

The binary outputs OPRLOALM and OPRALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input
is activated.

12.18.7.5 Accumulation of Iyt

Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.

The operation of the module can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

496
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

GUID-DAC3746F-DFBF-4186-A99D-1D972578D32A V1 EN

Figure 236: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and
alarm

Accumulated energy calculator

This module calculates the accumulated energy Iyt [(kA)ys]. The factor y is set with
the CurrExp setting.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input open events. It ends when the
RMS current becomes lower than the AccDisLevel setting value.

GUID-75502A39-4835-4F43-A7ED-A80DC7C1DFA2 V1 EN

Figure 237: Significance of theDiffTimeCorr setting

The DiffTimeCorr setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the
energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation
of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to
the value set with the DiffTimeCorr setting. When the setting is negative, the
calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens.

The accumulated energy outputs IACCL1 (L2, L3) are available through the
Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values
can be reset by setting the Clear accum. breaking curr setting to on in the clear menu
from LHMI.

497
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

The IACCALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value set
with the AccCurrAlmLvl threshold setting. However, when the energy exceeds the
limit value set with the AccCurrLO threshold setting, the IACCLOAL output is
activated.

The IACCALM and IACCLOAL outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input
BLOCK.

12.18.7.6 Remaining life of the circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wear off.
The breaker wear off depends on the tripping current. The remaining life of the
breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer.
The remaining life is decremented at least by one when the circuit breaker is opened.
The operation of the remaining life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be described
by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-1565CD41-3ABF-4DE7-AF68-51623380DF29 V1 EN

Figure 238: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker life estimator

The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit
breaker. If the tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the
RatedOpCurr setting, the remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one
operation. If the tripping current is more than the rated fault current set with the
RatedFaultCurr setting, then remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced
by the OperNoRated/OperNoFault value. The remaining life due to the tripping
current in between these two values is calculated based on the trip curve given by the
manufacturer. The OpNumRatCurr and OPNumFaultCurr parameters set the number
of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current and at the rated fault current,
respectively.

498
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a
monitored data value CBLIFEL1 (L2, L3). The values can be cleared by setting
the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from LHMI.

Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of any phase drops below the LifeAlmLevel threshold setting,
the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLOCK. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by
writing the value to the Initial CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the value via the
clear menu from LHMI.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLOCK.

12.18.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charged indication

The circuit breaker spring charged indication subfunction calculates the spring
charging time.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-37EB9FAE-8129-45AB-B9F7-7F7DC829E3ED V1 EN

Figure 239: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charged
indication and alarm

Spring charge time measurement

Two binary inputs, SPRCHRGN and SPRCHRGD, indicate spring charging started and
spring charged, respectively. The spring charging time is calculated from the
difference of these two signal timings.

The spring charging time SPRCHRT is available through the Monitored data view .

499
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
tSprngChrgAlm setting, the subfunction generates the SPRCHRAL alarm.

It is possible to block the SPRCHRAL alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary
input.

12.18.7.8 Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-A913D2D7-398B-41F6-9B21-BBCECD3F596D V1 EN

Figure 240: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm

The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals LOPRES and
ALMPRES.

Pressure alarm time delay

When the ALMPRES binary input is activated, the PRESALM alarm is activated after
a time delay set with the tPressAlm setting. The PRESALM alarm can be blocked by
activating the BLOCK input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the LOPRES binary input becomes
high, activating the lockout alarm PRESLO after a time delay set with the TPressLO
setting. The PRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLK_ALM.

500
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.18.8 Technical data

Table 431: SSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm levels for open and close (0-200) ms ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
travel time
Alarm levels for number of (0 - 9999) -
operations
Setting of alarm for spring (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
charging time
Time delay for gas pressure (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
alarm
Time delay for gas pressure (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
lockout

12.19 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

12.19.1 Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The measurand reporting interval set for MMXU function blocks, using the
xDbRepInt and xAngDbRepInt settings, must be coordinated with the event reporting
interval set for the IEC 60870-5-103 communication using setting CycMeasRepTime.

501
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

GUID-B8A3A04C-430D-4488-9F72-8529FAB0B17D V1 EN

Figure 241: Settings for CMMXU: 1

All input signals to IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS must be connected in application

configuration. Connect an input signals on IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS that is not
connected to the corresponding output on MMXU function, to outputs on the fixed
signal function block.

12.19.2 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN

Figure 242: I103MEAS function block

502
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.19.3 Signals
Table 432: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

12.19.4 Settings
Table 433: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVA 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

503
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.20 Measurands user defined signals for IEC

60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR

12.20.1 Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

12.20.2 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 243: I103MEASUSR function block

12.20.3 Signals
Table 434: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

504
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.20.4 Settings
Table 435: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 9

12.21 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103

I103AR

12.21.1 Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

12.21.2 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN

Figure 244: I103AR function block

505
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.21.3 Signals
Table 436: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

12.21.4 Settings
Table 437: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

12.22 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103

I103EF

12.22.1 Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.

12.22.2 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 245: I103EF function block

12.22.3 Signals
Table 438: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

506
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.22.4 Settings
Table 439: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

12.23 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

12.23.1 Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

507
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.23.2 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN

Figure 246: I103FLTPROT function block

12.23.3 Signals
Table 440: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
Table continues on next page

508
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system
phase L1
87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system
phase L2
88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system
phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system
neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

12.23.4 Settings
Table 441: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

12.24 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

12.24.1 Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.

509
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

12.24.2 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN

Figure 247: I103IED function block

12.24.3 Signals
Table 442: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

12.24.4 Settings
Table 443: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

12.25 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103

I103SUPERV

12.25.1 Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications
in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

510
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.25.2 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 248: I103SUPERV function block

12.25.3 Signals
Table 444: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

12.25.4 Settings
Table 445: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

12.26 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

12.26.1 Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the information number parameter for each input signal.

511
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Monitoring

I103USRDEF can be used, for example in mapping the INF numbers not supported
directly by specific function blocks, like: INF17, INF18, INF20 or INF35. After
connecting the appropriate signals to the I103USRDEF inputs, the user must also set
the InfNo_x values in the settings.

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN

Figure 249: IEC 60870-5-103I103USRDEF:1

12.26.2 Function block

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8

IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN

Figure 250: I103USRDEF function block

12.26.3 Signals
Table 446: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8

512
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 12
Monitoring

12.26.4 Settings
Table 447: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)

513
Technical manual
514
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 13
Metering

Section 13 Metering

13.1 Pulse counter PCGGIO

13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse counter PCGGIO -

S00947 V1 EN

13.1.2 Functionality
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the BIO (binary input/output) module
and then read by the PCGGIO function. A scaled service value is available over the
station bus.

13.1.3 Function block

PCGGIO
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC09000335-2-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V2 EN

Figure 251: PCGGIO function block

13.1.4 Signals
Table 448: PCGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

515
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Metering

Table 449: PCGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

13.1.5 Settings
Table 450: PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit
per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

13.1.6 Monitored data

Table 451: PCGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter
value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

13.1.7 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done according to setting of CountCriteria parameter on
one of the 9 binary input channels located on the BIO module. Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

516
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 13
Metering

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by IEC 61850.

Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental

counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter value is stored in semiretain memory.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be time tagged,
and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value
was frozen by the function.

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to logics, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to
READ_VAL performs readings according to the setting of parameter CountCriteria.
The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
binary input output module (BIO).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each PCGGIO function block has four binary output signals that can be used for event
recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. These signals and
the SCAL_VAL signal are accessable over IEC 61850.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the binary input module, where the
pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up,
in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during
last integration cycle.

517
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Metering

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The binary input module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.

13.1.8 Technical data

Table 452: PCGGIO technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s -
value

13.2 Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR

13.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Energy calculation and demand ETPMMTR -
handling
Wh
IEC10000169 V1 EN

13.2.2 Functionality
Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate
energy consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and
export direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power
values are also calculated by the function.

518
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 13
Metering

13.2.3 Function block

ETPMMTR
P ACCST
Q EAFPULSE
STACC EARPULSE
RSTACC ERFPULSE
RSTDMD ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC09000104 V1 EN

Figure 252: ETPMMTR function block

13.2.4 Signals
Table 453: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

Table 454: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCST BOOLEAN Start of accumulating energy values
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
Table continues on next page

519
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Metering

Name Type Description

EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value
for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse
direction

13.2.5 Settings
Table 455: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
StartAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time
tEnergyOffPls 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 456: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
Table continues on next page

520
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 13
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
energy

13.2.6 Monitored data

Table 457: ETPMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

13.2.7 Operation principle

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available
as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter.

521
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Metering

Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated
energy values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or with input signal
RSTACC.

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a
register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD,
MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse
direction until reset with input signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.

CVMMXN ETPMMTR
P_INST P
Q_INST Q

STACC
TRUE
RSTACC
FALSE
RSTDMD
FALSE

IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN

Figure 253: Connection of Energy calculation and demand handling function

(ETPMMTR) to the Measurements function (CVMMXN)

13.2.8 Technical data

Table 458: ETPMMTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVArh Input from MMXU. No extra
Export/Import error at steady load

522
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

Section 14 Station communication

14.1 DNP3 protocol

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

14.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

14.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IEC 61850-8-1 - -

14.2.2 Functionality
The IED supports the communication protocols IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP3 over TCP/
IP. All operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
However, some communication functions, for example, horizontal communication
(GOOSE) between the IEDs, is only enabled by the IEC 61850-8-1 communication
protocol.

The IED is equipped with optical Ethernet rear port(s) for the substation
communication standard IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent
electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to GOOSE is
part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

Disturbance files are accessed using the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are
also available to any Ethernet based application via FTP in the standard Comtrade
format. Further, the IED can send and receive binary values, double point values and
measured values (for example from MMXU functions), together with their quality bit,
using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The IED meets the GOOSE performance
requirements for tripping applications in substations, as defined by the IEC 61850
standard. The IED interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs, and systems
and simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station
bus.

523
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

The Denial of Service functions DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT are included to limit the
inbound network traffic. The communication can thus never compromise the primary
functionality of the IED.

The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota
of 10 events/second after the initial 30 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the
event channel transmission is blocked until the event changes is below the quota, no
event is lost.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated communication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based
communication systems via the fibre-optic multimode LC connector(s) (100BASE-
FX).

The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a time-
stamping accuracy of ±1 ms.

• Ethernet based: SNTP and DNP3

• With time synchronization wiring: IRIG-B

The IED supports IEC 60870-5-103 time synchronization methods with a time
stamping accuracy of ±5 ms.

14.2.3 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 459: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
Glass fibre (ST
100BASE-FX LC EIA-485
connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

14.2.4 Settings
Table 460: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LAN1 Port selection for GOOSE communication
LAN1
PortSelMMS Front - - LAN1 Port selection for MMS communication
LAN1
Front+LAN1

524
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

14.2.5 Technical data

Table 461: Communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol TCP/IP Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol IEC 61850–8–1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol DNP3.0/TCP
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol, serial IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol, serial DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd

14.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking

14.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Horizontal communication via GOOSE GOOSEINTLKR - -
for interlocking CV

525
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

14.3.2 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN

Figure 254: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

14.3.3 Signals
Table 462: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

526
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

Table 463: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
Table continues on next page

527
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL BOOLEAN Receive communication status is valid

14.3.4 Settings
Table 464: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

14.4 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

14.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV - -

528
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

14.4.2 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL

IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN

Figure 255: GOOSEBINRCV function block

14.4.3 Signals
Table 465: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 466: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
OUT2VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
OUT3VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
Table continues on next page

529
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT4VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
OUT5VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
OUT6VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
OUT7VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
OUT8VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
OUT9VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
OUT10VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
OUT11VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
OUT12VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
OUT13VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
OUT14VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
OUT15VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
OUT16VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16

14.4.4 Settings
Table 467: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

14.4.5 Operation principle

The OUTxVAL output, where 1≤x≤16, will be HIGH if the incoming message is with
valid data.

The OUTxVAL output contains both quality validity and communication validity
since GOOSEBINRCV function has no COMMVALID output.

530
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the binary values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the OUTxVAL
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then
the OUTxVAL output will be LOW.

14.5 GOOSE function block to receive a double point

value GOOSEDPRCV

14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

14.5.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

14.5.3 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 256: GOOSEDPRCV function block

14.5.4 Signals
Table 468: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

531
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

Table 469: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.5.5 Settings
Table 470: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

14.5.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.6 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

14.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

532
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

14.6.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

14.6.3 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 257: GOOSEINTRCV function block

14.6.4 Signals
Table 471: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 472: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.6.5 Settings
Table 473: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

14.6.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

533
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.7 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

14.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

14.7.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

14.7.3 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 258: GOOSEMVRCV function block

14.7.4 Signals
Table 474: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

534
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

Table 475: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.7.5 Settings
Table 476: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

14.7.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.8 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

14.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

535
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

14.8.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

14.8.3 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 259: GOOSESPRCV function block

14.8.4 Signals
Table 477: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 478: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.8.5 Settings
Table 479: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

14.8.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

536
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of

a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the
DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.9 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

14.9.1 Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 19200 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and
a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

Function blocks available for the IEC 60870–5–103 protocol are described in sections
Control and Monitoring.The Communication protocol manual for IEC 60870-5-103
includes the 650 series vendor specific IEC 60870-5-103 implementation.

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol can be configured to use either the optical serial or RS485
serial communication interface on the COM03 or the COM05 communication
module. The functions Operation selection for optical serial OPTICALPROT and
Operation selection for RS485 RS485PROT are used to select the communication
interface.

See the Engineering manual for IEC103 60870-5-103 engineering

procedures in PCM600.

The function IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial communication, OPTICAL103, is used

to configure the communication parameters for the optical serial communication
interface. The function IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485,
RS485103, is used to configure the communication parameters for the RS485 serial
communication interface.

537
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

14.9.2 Settings
Table 480: OPTICAL103 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 255 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
RevPolarity Off - - On Invert polarity
On
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy Off - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

Table 481: RS485103 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 255 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy Off - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

14.10 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

538
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
System component for parallel PRPSTATUS - -
redundancy protocol

14.10.1 Functionality
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is
available as option in the Customized 650 Ver 1.3 series IEDs, and the selection is
made at ordering. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3
Edition 2 uses both ports LAN1A and LAN1B on the COM03 module.

Select COM03 for redundant station bus according to IEC 62439-3

Edition 2 protocol, at the time of ordering.
IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is NOT compatible with IEC 62439-3 Edition
1.

14.10.2 Principle of operation

The redundant station bus communication is configured using the local HMI, Main
Menu/Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuation/ETHLAN1_AB.
The settings are also visible in PST in PCM600.

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is

transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one
channel is compared with the data package identity from the other channel. If the
identity is the same, the last package is discarded.

PRPSTATUS supervises redundant communication on the two channels. If no data

package has been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s, the output
LAN1-A and/or LAN1-B are set to indicate error.

539
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data Data

A B
IED
COM03

PRPSTATUS

IEC13000003-1-en.vsd
IEC13000003 V1 EN

Figure 260: Redundant station bus

14.10.3 Function block

PRPSTATUS
LAN1-A
LAN1-B

IEC13000011-1-en.vsd
IEC13000011 V1 EN

Figure 261: PRPSTATUS function block

Table 482: PRPSTATUS Output signals

Name Type Description
LAN1-A BOOLEAN LAN1 channel A status
LAN1-B BOOLEAN LAN1 channel B status

540
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 14
Station communication

14.10.4 Setting parameters

The PRPSTATUS function has no user settings.

However, the redundant communication is configured in the LHMI under Main

menu/Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuration/ETHLAN1_AB
where Operation mode, IPAddress and IPMask are configured.

14.11 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

14.11.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

14.11.2 Settings
Table 483: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Off - - Off External log server 2 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Off - - Off External log server 3 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Off - - Off External log server 4 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
Table continues on next page

541
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv5Type Off - - Off External log server 5 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Off - - Off External log server 6 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

14.12 Generic security application component AGSAL

14.12.1 Generic security application AGSAL

As a logical node AGSAL is used for monitoring security violation regarding
authorization, access control and inactive association including authorization failure.
Therefore, all the information in AGSAL can be configured to report to 61850 client.

14.13 Security events on protocols SECALARM

14.13.1 Security alarm SECALARM

14.13.2 Signals
Table 484: SECALARM Output signals
Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

14.13.3 Settings
Table 485: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On

542
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Section 15 Basic IED functions

15.1 Self supervision with internal event list

15.1.1 Functionality
The Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST
function reacts to internal system events generated by the different built-in self-
supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list presented
on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.

15.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG

15.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Internal error signal INTERRSIG - -

15.1.2.2 Function block

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK

IEC09000334-2-en.vsd
IEC09000334 V2 EN

Figure 262: INTERRSIG function block

15.1.2.3 Signals
Table 486: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

543
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.1.2.4 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

15.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST

15.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST - -

15.1.3.2 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

15.1.4 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600. Both events from the Event list and the internal events are
listed in time consecutive order in the Event Viewer.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free change-

over alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This
output contact is activated (where there is no fault) and deactivated (where there is a
fault) by the Internal Fail signal, see Figure 263. The software watchdog timeout and
the undervoltage detection of the PSM will deactivate the contact as well.

544
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Power supply fault Power supply Fault

module

Watchdog I/O nodes

TX overflow
Master resp. Fault
Supply fault AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL

Internal Fail (CPU) Fault

CEM

I/O nodes = BIO

xxxx = Inverted signal

IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN

Figure 263: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact

545
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

LIODEV FAIL
>1
LIODEV STOPPED S e.g.BIO1- ERROR
R
LIODEV STARTED

>1

WDOG STARVED SW Watchdog Error >1 Internal Fail

RTE FATAL ERROR Runtime Exec Error

FTF FATAL ERROR File System Error >1

RTE APP FAILED S

Runtime App Error
R
RTE ALL APPS OK

GENTS RTC ERROR

S
Real Time Clock Error
GENTS RTC OK R

IEC 61850 NOT READY S

IEC 61850 Error
R >1 Internal Warning
IEC 61850 READY DNP 3 Error

DNP 3 STARTUP
ERROR S
DNP 3 READY R

GENTS SYNC ERROR S

>1 Time Synch Error
GENTS TIME RESET
R
GENTS SYNC OK

CHANGE LOCK ON S
Change lock
CHANGE LOCK OFF R
SETTINGS CHANGED Setting groups changed

SETTINGS CHANGED Settings changed

IEC09000381-2-en.vsd
IEC09000381 V2 EN

Figure 264: Self supervision, function block internal signals

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control
system. The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to
binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block INTERSIG.

15.1.4.1 Internal signals

SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the
condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED,

546
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two
groups.

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 487.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 488.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 489.

Table 487: SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals
Name of signal Description
Internal Fail Internal fail status
Internal Warning Internal warning status
Real Time Clock Error Real time clock status
Time Synch Error Time synchronization status
Runtime App Error Runtime application error status
Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status
IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status
SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status
Setting(s) Changed Setting(s) changed
Setting Group(s) Changed Setting group(s) changed
Change Lock Change lock status
File System Error Fault tolerant file system status
DNP3 Error DNP3 error status

Table 488: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power supply module error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformator module error status
COM COM-Error Communication module error status
BIO BIO-Error Binary input/output module error status
AIM AIM-Error Analog input module error status

Table 489: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
Internal Fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following
internal signals are active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime
App Error, Runtime Exec Error, SW Watchdog Error, File
System Error
Internal Warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following
internal signals are active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error
Real Time Clock Error This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.
Table continues on next page

547
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

Name of signal Reasons for activation

Time Synch Error This signal will be active when the source of the time
synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make
a time reset.
Runtime Exec Error This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do
some actions with the application threads. The actions can
be loading of settings or parameters for components,
changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of
application threads.
IEC61850 Error This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not
succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup, for example.
SW Watchdog Error This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
Runtime App Error This signal will be active if one or more of the application
threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The
states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for
example.
Setting(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the internal
event list if any setting(s) is changed.
Setting Group(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the Internal
Event List if any setting group(s) is changed.
Change Lock This signal will generate an internal Event to the Internal
Event List if the Change Lock status is changed
File System Error This signal will be active if both the working file and the
backup file are corrupted and cannot be recovered.
DNP3 Error This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
configuration error during startup.

15.1.4.2 Run-time model

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
265.

548
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

ADx
ADx_Low
x1

u1

x2

ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1

u1

x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 265: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal
conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An
alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it
improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller

function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. The ADx_Controller function is included in all IEDs equipped with an analog
input module. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is
the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that
is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher
ADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will
be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

15.1.5 Technical data

Table 490: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

549
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.2 Time synchronization

15.2.1 Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a control and a protection system. This
makes it possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station
automation system.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time

synchronization source.

15.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

15.2.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGE - -
N

15.2.2.2 Settings
Table 491: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SNTP
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SNTP
IRIG-B
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IED as synchronization master
SNTP-Server

15.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP

15.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time synchronization via SNTP SNTP - -

550
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.2.3.2 Settings
Table 492: SNTP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

15.2.4 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN

15.2.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time system, summer time begins DSTBEGIN - -

15.2.4.2 Settings
Table 493: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
00:30 time starts
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

551
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.2.5 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND

15.2.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND - -

15.2.5.2 Settings
Table 494: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
00:30 time ends
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

15.2.6 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE

15.2.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE - -

552
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.2.6.2 Settings
Table 495: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 - 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC

15.2.7 Time synchronization via IRIG-B

15.2.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time synchronization via IRIG-B IRIG-B - -

15.2.7.2 Settings
Table 496: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

15.2.8 Operation principle

15.2.8.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.

553
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

External Time tagging and general synchronization
synchronization
sources Commu Protection
Events
Off - nication and control
functions
SNTP
IRIG-B Time-
regulator
DNP SW- time
IEC60870-5-103

IEC09000210-2-en.vsd
IEC09000210 V2 EN

Figure 266: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.
A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 267: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

554
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.2.8.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last
up time, the time in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power
has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at
1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization
startup procedure" and section "".

Time synchronization startup procedure

Coarse time synchronization is used to set the time on the very first message and if any
message has an offset of more than ten seconds. If no FineSyncSource is given, the
CoarseSyncSource is used to synchronize the time.

Fine time synchronization is used to set the time on the first message after a time reset
or if the source may always set the fine time, and the source gives a large offset
towards the IED time. After this, the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike
filter, i.e. if the source glitches momentarily or there is a momentary error, this is
neglected. FineSyncSource that may always set the time is only IRIG-B.

It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source, as
some clocks sometimes send out a bad message. For example, Arbiter clocks
sometimes send out a "zero-time message", which if SNTP is set as coarse
synchronization source (with or without SNTP as fine synchronization source) leads
to a jump to "2036-02-07 06:28" and back. In all cases, except for demonstration, it is
recommended to use SNTP as FineSynchSource only.

Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for
a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is
constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally,
the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but
if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

555
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.2.8.3 Synchronization alternatives

Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The

synchronization message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the
IED as a telegram message including date and time or via IRIG-B.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate
properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However shall SNTP normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source.
The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or
at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

Synchronization via IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating
if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x
messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number
in the range of 1-7.

If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of

the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and
year information has to come from the tool or local HMI.

The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages.

556
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Synchronization via DNP

The DNP3 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization,
while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the
communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol.

Synchronization via IEC60870-5-103

The IEC60870-5-103 communication can be the source for the coarse time
synchronization, while the fine tuning of the time synchronization needs a source with
higher accuracy. See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of
the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.

15.2.9 Technical data

Table 497: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement ± 1.0 ms typically
values

15.3 Parameter setting group handling

15.3.1 Functionality
Use the four different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.

15.3.2 Setting group handling SETGRPS

15.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Setting group handling SETGRPS - -

557
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.3.2.2 Settings
Table 498: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 ActiveSettingGroup
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
MaxNoSetGrp 1-4 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-4

15.3.3 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP

15.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP - -

15.3.3.2 Function block

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
SETCHGD

IEC09000064_en_1.vsd
IEC09000064 V1 EN

Figure 268: ACTVGRP function block

15.3.3.3 Signals
Table 499: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active

558
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Table 500: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed

15.3.3.4 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

15.3.4 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Five functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always
available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACTVGRP function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse. This signal is normally connected to a SP16GGIO function block for external
communication.

The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.

559
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ACTVGRP
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
Æ ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4

SETCHGD

IEC09000063_en_1.vsd
IEC09000063 V1 EN

Figure 269: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also shows the five output signals, GRP1 to 4 for confirmation of
which group that is active, and the SETCHGD signal which is normally connected to
a SP16GGIO function block for external communication to higher level control
systems.

15.4 Test mode functionality TESTMODE

15.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Test mode functionality TESTMODE - -

15.4.2 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with

560
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.

15.4.3 Function block

TESTMODE
INPUT ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN

Figure 270: TESTMODE function block

15.4.4 Signals

Table 501: TESTMODE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active

Table 502: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode

15.4.5 Settings

Table 503: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TestMode Off - - Off Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off)
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during testmode
On
CmdTestBit Off - - Off Command bit for test required or not
On during testmode

561
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.4.6 Operation principle

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/Tests/IED test
mode/1:TESTMODE.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE
is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
“Test mode: being in On” state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal
is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from
the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output
ACTIVE is activated). When leaving the test mode, and returning to normal operation,
these blockings are disabled and everything is set back to normal operation. All testing
will be done with actually set and configured parameter values within the IED. No
settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test mode
is set to off.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED
will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also
functions that were unblocked before the change. During the re-
entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for
a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only
valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local
HMI.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions

when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

562
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.

15.5 Change lock function CHNGLCK

15.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Change lock function CHNGLCK - -

15.5.2 Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED
configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked"
will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied
by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is
controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that
signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal
path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot
permanently issue a logical one to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would
occur in spite of these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative
for remedial action.

15.5.3 Function block

CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE

IEC09000062-1-en.vsd
IEC09000062 V1 EN

Figure 271: CHNGLCK function block

15.5.4 Signals
Table 504: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

563
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

Table 505: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

15.5.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

15.5.6 Operation principle

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function
1 Activated
0 Deactivated

15.6 IED identifiers TERMINALID

15.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IED identifiers TERMINALID - -

564
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.6.2 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

15.6.3 Settings
Table 506: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 18 - 1 AA0J0Q0A0 Technical key

15.7 Product information

15.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Product information PRODINF - -

15.7.2 Functionality
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set,
settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:

• IEDProdType
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

565
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers

They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

15.7.3 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.8 Primary system values PRIMVAL

15.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

15.8.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and
PCM600 parameter setting tree.

15.8.3 Settings
Table 507: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

15.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

15.9.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor
function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all
aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency,
harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions in ACT (for example protection, measurement or
monitoring).

566
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
tool or the Application Configuration tool.

The SMAI function blocks for the 650 series of products are possible
to set for two cycle times either 5 or 20ms. The function blocks
connected to a SMAI function block shall always have the same cycle
time as the SMAI block.

15.9.2 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_x - -

15.9.3 Function block

SMAI_20_1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP1L1 AI2
^GRP1L2 AI3
^GRP1L3 AI4
^GRP1N AIN

IEC09000137-1-en.vsd
IEC09000137 V1 EN

Figure 272: SMAI_20_1 function block

SMAI_20_2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN

IEC09000138-2-en.vsd
IEC09000138 V2 EN

Figure 273: SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 function block

Note that input and output signals on SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 are

the same except for input signals GRPxL1 to GRPxN where x is equal
to instance number (2 to 12).

567
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.9.4 Signals
Table 508: SMAI_20_1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for
DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 509: SMAI_20_1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are
connected

Table 510: SMAI_20_12 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 12
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 12
GRP12L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP12L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP12L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP12N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

568
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Table 511: SMAI_20_12 Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are
connected

15.9.5 Settings
Table 512: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

569
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

Table 513: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to

Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that
the minimum level for current amplitude is based on UBase. For
example, if UBase is 20000, the minimum amplitude for current is
20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect only if the current
measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference for the adaptive
DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

Table 514: SMAI_20_12 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 515: SMAI_20_12 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

570
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to

Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that
the minimum level for current amplitude is based on UBase. For
example, if UBase is 20000, the minimum amplitude for current is
20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect only if the current
measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference for the adaptive
DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

15.9.6 Operation principle

Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value),
either voltage or current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the
input connected. The signal received by SMAI is processed internally and in total 244
different electrical parameters are obtained for example RMS value, peak-to-peak,
frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK input resets all outputs to 0.

SMAI_20 does all the calculation based on nominal 20 samples per line frequency
period, this gives a sample frequency of 1 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 1.2
kHz at 60 Hz nominal line frequency.

The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the
connected input signals GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN. GRPxN is always
the neutral current. If GRPxN is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN output
is the calculated residual quantity, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3 but is equal to output AI4 if GRPxN is connected. The outputs signal AI1,
AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to the analog disturbance recorder.

The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in

case only the three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPxN input not
used).

The output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal
containing all processed electrical information from inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2,
GRPxL3 and GRPxN. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected
to AI3P.

The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.

A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.

571
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

• It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is very
important that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one
SMAI function.
• The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2,
GRPxL3 and GRPxN should normally represent phase L1, phase L2, phase L3
and neutral currents respectively.
• It is possible to connect analog signals available as Ph-N or Ph-Ph to SMAI.
ConnectionType should be set according to the input connected.
• If the GRPxN input is not connected and all three phase-to-earth inputs are
connected, SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the
AI3P and AIN outputs. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to
Ph-N.
• If any two phase-to-earth inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI
calculates the remaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available
at the AI3P output. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-
N.
• If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining
third phase-to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType
should be set to Ph-Ph.
• All three inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequence
components for ConnectionType set to Ph-N.
• At least two inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating the
positive and negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph-Ph.
Calculation of zero sequence requires GRPxN input to be connected.
• Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal. It is
recommended that use of this setting is done with care, mistake in setting may
lead to maloperation of directional functions.

Frequency adaptivity

SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical

parameters. DFT uses some reference frequency for performing calculations. For
most of the cases, these calculations are done using a fixed DFT reference based on
system frequency. However, if the frequency of the network is expected to vary more
than 2 Hz from the nominal frequency, more accurate DFT results can be obtained if
the adaptive DFT is used. This means that the frequency of the network is tracked and
the DFT calculation is adapted according to that.

DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT

calculations.

DFTRefExtOut: Setting valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_20_1. It
decides the reference block for external output SPFCOUT.

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. This setting decides DFT reference for
DFT calculations. DFTReference set to InternalDFTRef uses fixed DFT reference
based on the set system frequency. DFTReference set to DFTRefGrpX uses DFT
reference from the selected group block, when own group selected adaptive DFT

572
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

reference will be used based on the calculated signal frequency from own group.
DFTReference set to External DFT Ref will use reference based on input signal
DFTSPFC.

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is
necessary to use frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other
than default, referring current measuring SMAI) when no voltages are
available, note that the MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in
reference to UBase (of the selected GBASVAL group). This means
that the minimum level for the current amplitude is based on UBase.
For example, if UBase is 20000, the resulting minimum amplitude for
current is 20000 * 10% = 2000.

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of the voltage in the selected Global Base voltage
group (GBASVAL:n, where 1<n<6).

Below example shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application.

573
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1 Task time group 2

(5ms) (20ms)
SMAI_20_1:1 SMAI_20_1:2
BLOCK SPFCOUT BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1 REVROT AI1
GRP1L1 AI2 GRP1L1 AI2
GRP1L2 AI3 GRP1L2 AI3
GRP1L3 AI4 GRP1L3 AI4
GRP1N AIN GRP1N AIN

Task time group 1 (5ms) Task time group 2 (20ms)

SMAI instance 3 phase group SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI_20_1:1 1 SMAI_20_1:2 1
SMAI_20_2:1 2 SMAI_20_2:2 2
SMAI_20_3:1 3 SMAI_20_3:2 3
SMAI_20_4:1 4 SMAI_20_4:2 4
SMAI_20_5:1 5 SMAI_20_5:2 5
SMAI_20_6:1 6 DFTRefGrp7 SMAI_20_6:2 6
SMAI_20_7:1 7 SMAI_20_7:2 7
SMAI_20_8:1 8 SMAI_20_8:2 8
SMAI_20_9:1 9 SMAI_20_9:2 9
SMAI_20_10:1 10 SMAI_20_10:2 10
SMAI_20_11:1 11 SMAI_20_11:2 11
SMAI_20_12:1 12 SMAI_20_12:2 12

IEC11000284-1-en.vsd
IEC11000284 V1 EN

Figure 274: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT
reference

Assume instance SMAI_20_7:1 in task time group 1 has been selected in the
configuration to control the frequency tracking (For the SMAI_20_x task time
groups). Note that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings:

For SMAI_20_1:1

DFTRefExtOut set to DFTRefGrp7 so as to route SMAI_20_7:1 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as
reference.

For SMAI_20_2:1 to SMAI_20_12:1

DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

For SMAI_20_1:2 to SMAI_20_12:2

DFTReference set to External DFT ref to use DFTSPFC input as reference.

574
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

15.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM - -

15.10.2 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need
it.

15.10.3 Function block

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC09000201_1_en.vsd
IEC09000201 V1 EN

Figure 275: 3PHSUM function block

15.10.4 Signals
Table 516: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second
SIGNAL SMAI

575
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

Table 517: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase
inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both
SMAI blocks

15.10.5 Settings
Table 518: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 519: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in
% of Ubase

15.10.6 Operation principle

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

15.11 Global base values GBASVAL

576
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

15.11.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.

15.11.3 Settings

Table 520: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UBase 0.05 - 1000.00 kV 0.05 132.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 50000 A 1 1000 Global base current
SBase 0.050 - 5000.000 MVA 0.001 229.000 Global base apparent power

15.12 Authority check ATHCHCK

15.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

15.12.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

577
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user
management tool.

IEC12000202-1-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V1 EN

Figure 276: PCM600 user management tool

15.12.3 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

15.12.4 Operation principle

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 521.

578
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

Table 521: Pre-defined user types

User type Access rights
SystemOperator Control from local HMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED,
there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 12.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to

be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

15.12.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and written to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, using the
password assigned in the tool. Then the default user will be Guest.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user
defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Configuration/HMI/Screen/SCREEN:1) elapses, the IED returns to Guest
state, when only reading is possible. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60
minutes.

If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the
IED, then, when a user attempts a Log on by pressing the key or when the user
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window
opens.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, one can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows.
After choosing the right user name, the user must press the key again. When it

579
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

comes to password, upon pressing the key, the following characters will show up:
“✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳”. The user must scroll for every letter in the password. After all the
letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the key
again.

At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the
bottom of the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, an "Error Access Denied" message opens. If a user enters an
incorrect password three times, that user will be blocked for ten minutes before a new
attempt to log in can be performed. The user will be blocked from logging in, both
from the local HMI and PCM600. However, other users are to log in during this
period.

15.13 Authority management AUTHMAN

15.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

15.13.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.

15.13.3 Settings
Table 522: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuEnable No - - Yes Maintenance menu enabled
Yes
AuthTimeout 10 Min - - 10 Min Authority blocking timeout
20 Min
30 Min
40 Min
50 Min
60 Min

580
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.14 FTP access with password FTPACCS

15.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

15.14.2 FTP access with SSL FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate
with SSL.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features. It tries to
immediately activate implicit SSL if the specified port is 990. If the specified port is
any other, it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.

Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a

specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer.
The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

15.14.3 Settings
Table 523: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Front+LAN1 Port selection for communication
Front
LAN1
Front+LAN1
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
TCPPortFTPS 1 - 65535 - 1 990 TCP port for FTP with Implicit SSL

581
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.15 Authority status ATHSTAT

15.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

15.15.2 Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

15.15.3 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN

Figure 277: ATHSTAT function block

15.15.4 Signals
Table 524: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

15.15.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

15.15.6 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:

582
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated.

15.16 Denial of service

15.16.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit
overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication
facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device.
All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads
can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

15.16.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT

15.16.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Denial of service, frame rate control for DOSFRNT - -
front port

15.16.2.2 Function block

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN

Figure 278: DOSFRNT function block

15.16.2.3 Signals
Table 525: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

583
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.16.2.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.16.2.5 Monitored data

Table 526: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

15.16.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1

15.16.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Denial of service, frame rate control for DOSLAN1 - -
LAN1 port

584
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.16.3.2 Function block

DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN

Figure 279: DOSLAN1 function block

15.16.3.3 Signals
Table 527: DOSLAN1 Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

15.16.3.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.16.3.5 Monitored data

Table 528: DOSLAN1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

585
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Basic IED functions

15.16.4 Operation principle

The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load
from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control
and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following
outputs:
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

586
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

Section 16 IED physical connections

16.1 Protective earth connections

The IED shall be earthed with a 16.0 mm2 flat copper cable.

The earth lead should be as short as possible, less than 1500 mm.
Additional length is required for door mounting.

IEC11000286 V1 EN

Figure 280: The protective earth pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the
3U full 19” case

16.2 Inputs

16.2.1 Measuring inputs

Each terminal for CTs/VTs is dimensioned for one 0.5...6.0 mm2 wire or for two wires
of maximum 2.5 mm2.

587
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED physical connections

Table 529: Analog input modules TRM

Terminal TRM TRM TRM TRM
6I + 4U 8I + 2U 4I + 1I + 5U 4I + 6U
X101-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-3, 4 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-5, 6 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-7, 8 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-9, 10 1/5A 1/5A 0.1/0.5A 100/220V
X102-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V
X102-3, 4 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V
X102-5, 6 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V
X102-7, 8 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V
X102-9, 10 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V

Table 530: Analog input modules AIM

Terminal AIM AIM
6I + 4U 4I + 1I + 5U
X103-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A
X103-3, 4 1/5A 1/5A
X103-5, 6 1/5A 1/5A
X103-7, 8 1/5A 1/5A
X103-9, 10 1/5A 0.1/0.5A
X104-1, 2 1/5A 100/220V
X104-3, 4 100/220V 100/220V
X104-5, 6 100/220V 100/220V
X104-7, 8 100/220V 100/220V
X104-9, 10 100/220V 100/220V

See the connection diagrams for information on the analog input

module variant included in a particular configured IED. The primary
and secondary rated values of the primary VT's and CT's are set for the
analog inputs of the IED.

16.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X420-1 and X420-2/3. The
terminals used depend on the power supply.

The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on top of the IED's LHMI.

588
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

Table 531: Auxiliary voltage supply of 110...250 V DC or 100...240 V AC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-1 - Input
X420-3 + Input

Table 532: Auxiliary voltage supply of 48-125 V DC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-1 - Input
X420-2 + Input

Table 533: Auxiliary voltage supply of 24-30 V DC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-3 - Input
X420-2 + Input

16.2.3 Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch
output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of IED
settings.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.

Table 534: Binary inputs X304, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-1 Common - for inputs 1-3
X304-2 Binary input 1 + COM_101 BI1
X304-3 Binary input 2 + COM_101 BI2
X304-4 Binary input 3 + COM_101 BI3
X304-5 Common - for inputs 4-6
X304-6 Binary input 4 + COM_101 BI4
X304-7 Binary input 5 + COM_101 BI5
X304-8 Binary input 6 + COM_101 BI6
X304-9 Common - for inputs 7-9
X304-10 Binary input 7 + COM_101 BI7
X304-11 Binary input 8 + COM_101 BI8
X304-12 Binary input 9 + COM_101 BI9
Table continues on next page

589
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-13 Common - for inputs 10-12
X304-14 Binary input 10 + COM_101 BI10
X304-15 Binary input 11 + COM_101 BI11
X304-16 Binary input 12 + COM_101 BI12

Table 535:
Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1 - for input 1 BIO_3 BI1
X324-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_3 BI1
X324-3 -
X324-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X324-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_3 BI2
X324-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_3 BI3
X324-7 -
X324-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X324-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_3 BI4
X324-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_3 BI5
X324-11 -
X324-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X324-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_3 BI6
X324-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_3 BI7
X324-15 -
X324-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X324-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_3 BI8
X324-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_3 BI9

Table 536: Binary inputs X329, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-1 - for input 1 BIO_4 BI1
X329-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_4 BI1
X329-3 -
X329-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X329-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_4 BI2
Table continues on next page

590
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_4 BI3
X329-7 -
X329-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X329-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_4 BI4
X329-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_4 BI5
X329-11 -
X329-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X329-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_4 BI6
X329-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_4 BI7
X329-15 -
X329-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X329-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_4 BI8
X329-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_4 BI9

Table 537: Binary inputs X334, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-1 - for input 1 BIO_5 BI1
X334-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_5 BI1
X334-3 -
X334-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X334-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_5 BI2
X334-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_5 BI3
X334-7 -
X334-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X334-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_5 BI4
X334-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_5 BI5
X334-11 -
X334-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X334-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_5 BI6
X334-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_5 BI7
X334-15 -
X334-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X334-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_5 BI8
X334-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_5 BI9

591
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED physical connections

Table 538: Binary inputs X339, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-1 - for input 1 BIO_6 BI1
X339-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_6 BI1
X339-3 -
X339-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X339-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_6 BI2
X339-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_6 BI3
X339-7 -
X339-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X339-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_6 BI4
X339-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_6 BI5
X339-11 -
X339-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X339-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_6 BI6
X339-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_6 BI7
X339-15 -
X339-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X339-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_6 BI8
X339-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_6 BI9

16.3 Outputs

16.3.1 Outputs for tripping, controlling and signalling

Output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3 are power output contacts used, for example, for
controlling circuit breakers.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.

The connected DC voltage to outputs with trip circuit supervision

(TCS) must have correct polarity or the trip circuit supervision
TCSSCBR function will not operate properly.

592
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

Table 539: Output contacts X317, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
Power output 1, normally open
(TCS)
X317-1 - PSM_102 BO1_PO_TCS
X317-2 +
Power output 2, normally open
(TCS)
X317-3 - PSM_102 BO2_PO_TCS
X317-4 +
Power output 3, normally open
(TCS)
X317-5 - PSM_102 BO3_PO_TCS
X317-6 +
X317-7 Power output 4, normally open PSM_102 BO4_PO
X317-8
X317-9 Power output 5, normally open PSM_102 BO5_PO
X317-10
X317-11 Power output 6, normally open PSM_102 BO6_PO
X317-12

Table 540: Output contacts X321, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO1_PO
X321-2
X321-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO2_PO
X321-4
X321-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO3_PO
X321-6

Table 541: Output contacts X326, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO1_PO
X326-2
X326-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO2_PO
Table continues on next page

593
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-4
X326-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO3_PO
X326-6

Table 542: Output contacts X331, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO1_PO
X331-2
X331-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO2_PO
X331-4
X331-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO3_PO
X331-6

Table 543: Output contacts X336, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO1_PO
X336-2
X336-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO2_PO
X336-4
X336-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO3_PO
X336-6

16.3.2 Outputs for signalling

Signal output contacts are used for signalling on starting and tripping of the IED. On
delivery from the factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protection stages are
routed to signalling outputs. See connection diagrams.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.

594
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

Table 544: Output contacts X317, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X317-13 Signal output 1, normally open PSM_102 BO7_SO
X317-14
X317-15 Signal output 2, normally open PSM_102 BO8_SO
X317-16
X317-17 Signal output 3, normally open PSM_102 BO9_SO
X317-18

Table 545: Output contacts X321, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO4_SO
X321-8 Signal output 1
X321-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO5_SO
X321-10 Signal output 2
X321-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO6_SO
X321-12 Signal output 3
X321-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_3 BO7_SO
X321-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_3 BO8_SO
X321-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X321-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_3 BO9_SO
X321-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X321-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 546: Output contacts X326, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO4_SO
X326-8 Signal output 1
X326-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO5_SO
X326-10 Signal output 2
X326-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO6_SO
X326-12 Signal output 3
X326-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_4 BO7_SO
X326-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_4 BO8_SO
X326-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
Table continues on next page

595
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_4 BO9_SO
X326-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X326-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 547: Output contacts X331, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO4_SO
X331-8 Signal output 1
X331-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO5_SO
X331-10 Signal output 2
X331-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO6_SO
X331-12 Signal output 3
X331-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_5 BO7_SO
X331-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_5 BO8_SO
X331-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X331-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_5 BO9_SO
X331-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X331-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 548: Output contacts X336, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO4_SO
X336-8 Signal output 1
X336-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO5_SO
X336-10 Signal output 2
X336-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO6_SO
X336-12 Signal output 3
X337-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_6 BO7_SO
X336-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_6 BO8_SO
X336-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X336-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_6 BO9_SO
X336-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X336-18 Signal output 6, common

596
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

16.3.3 IRF
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision
system of the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one
of the two contacts is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system
or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other
contact closes.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.

Table 549: IRF contact X319

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X319-1 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

X319-2 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X319-3 IRF, common

16.4 Communication connections

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for
configuration and setting purposes.

Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with
the optical LC Ethernet connection.

The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/
HMI connector must not be used for any other purpose.

Rear communication via the X8/EIA-485/IRIG-B connector uses a communication

module with the galvanic EIA-485 serial connection.

16.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use.
The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the
PC has to be configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically if the
DHCPServer is enabled in LHMI. There is a DHCP server inside IED for the front
interface only.

The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and
disturbance records can be read via the front communication port.

Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

• PCM600
• LHMI

597
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED physical connections

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 10.1.150.3.

The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable
is used with the front port.

16.4.2 Station communication rear connection

The default IP address of the IED through the Ethernet connection is 192.168.1.10.
The physical connector is X1/LAN1. The interface speed is 100 Mbps for the
100BASE-FX LC alternative.

If the COM03 communication module is used, the X1/LAN1 A should be used. For
redundant kommunication, X1/LAN A and X2/LAN B should be used. LAN2 A is not
used in this product.

16.4.3 Optical serial rear connection

Serial communication can be used via optical connection in star topology. Connector
type is glass (ST connector). Connection's idle state is indicated either with light on or
light off. The physical connector is X9/Rx,Tx.

16.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection

The communication module follows the EIA-485 standard and is intended to be used
in multi-point communication.

For the complete list of available connection diagrams, please refer to Section
Connection diagrams.

For four-wire connections, to terminate far end of the RS485 bus with the built-in 120
ohm resistors, connect X8:4 – 11 for Tx and X8:2 – 9 for Rx. This can be set via the
local HMI under Configuration/Communication/Station communication/RS485
port/RS485GEN:1/WireMode = Four-wire.

For two-wire connections, to terminate far end of the RS485 bus with the built-in 120
ohm resistors, connect X8:4 - 11. This can be set via the local HMI under
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/RS485 port/
RS485GEN:1/WireMode = Two-wire.

Configure one of the node on the bus with BIAS (On) in order to set the bus signals on
a defined level and non-floating which makes the bus more robust to disturbances.
This can be set via the local HMI under Configuration/Communication/Station
communication/RS485 port/RS485GEN:1/BIAS = On/Off.

To use the chassis grounds (grounding the cable shield, for example), the cable shield
should be grounded on one end at X8:8 (direct ground) and at the other end at X8:1 (via
capacitor).

598
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 16
IED physical connections

Termination of the RS485 bus is always recommended regardless of

the cable length.

16.4.5 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 550: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
Glass fibre (ST
100BASE-FX LC EIA-485
connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

16.4.6 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches

ABB recommends ABB industrial Ethernet switches.

16.5 Connection diagrams

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part
of the product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Customized products

Connection diagram, 650 series 1.3 1MRK006501-AD

Connection diagrams for Configured products

Connection diagram, REC650 1.3, (3Ph/1CBA) A01 1MRK006501-DD

Connection diagram, REC650 1.3, (3Ph/1CBAB) A02 1MRK006501-CD

Connection diagram, REC650 1.3, (BCAB) A07 1MRK006501-BD

599
Technical manual
600
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 17
Technical data

Section 17 Technical data

17.1 Dimensions

Table 551: Dimensions of the IED - 3U full 19" rack

Description Value
Width 444 mm (17.48 inches)
Height 132 mm (5.20 inches), 3U
Depth 249.5 mm (9.82 inches)
Weight box 10 kg (<22.04 lbs)

17.2 Power supply

Table 552: Power supply

Description PSM01 PSM02 PSM03
Uauxnominal 24, 30V DC 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC 100, 110, 120, 220,
240 V AC, 50 and 60
Hz
110, 125, 220, 250 V
DC
Uauxvariation 80...120% of Un 80...120% of Un 80...110% of Un
(19.2...36 V DC) (38.4...150 V DC) (80...264 V AC)
80...120% of Un
(88...300 V DC)
Maximum load of 35 W for DC
auxiliary voltage supply 40 VA for AC
Ripple in the DC Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz)
auxiliary voltage
Maximum interruption 50 ms at Uaux
time in the auxiliary DC
voltage without resetting
the IED
Resolution of the 1 bit represents 0,5 V 1 bit represents 1 V (+/- 1 bit represents 2 V (+/-
voltage measurement in (+/- 1 VDC) 1 VDC) 1 VDC)
PSM module

601
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Technical data

17.3 Energizing inputs

Table 553: TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for transformer inputs
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50 or 60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs
Rated current Ir 0.1 or 0.5 A1) 1 or 5 A2)
Operating range 0 – 50 A 0 – 500 A
Thermal withstand 100 A for 1 s 500 A for 1 s *)
20 A for 10 s 100 A for 10 s
8 A for 1 min 40 A for 1 min
4 A continuously 20 A continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 A one half wave 1250 A one half wave
Burden < 1 mVA at Ir = 0.1 A < 10 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 0.5 A < 200 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs**)
Rated voltage Ur 100 or 220 V

Operating range 0 – 420 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 50 mVA at 100 V
< 200 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

1) Residual current
2) Phase currents or residual current

17.4 Binary inputs

Table 554: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input <0.38 W
Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps
of 1% of the rated voltage)

602
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 17
Technical data

17.5 Signal outputs

Table 555: Signal output and IRF output

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤0.5 A/≤0.1 A/≤0.04 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U< 48/110/220 V DC

17.6 Power outputs

Table 556: Power output relays without TCS function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U< 48/110/220 V DC

Table 557: Power output relays with TCS function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U< 48/110/220 V DC
Control voltage range 20...250 V DC
Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.0 mA
Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V DC

603
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Technical data

17.7 Data communication interfaces

Table 558: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
100BASE-TX - CAT 6 S/FTP or better 100 MBits/s
100BASE-FX TCP/IP protocol Fibre-optic cable with 100 MBits/s
LC connector

Table 559: Fibre-optic communication link

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path Distance
attenuation1)
1300 nm MM 62.5/125 LC <8 dB 2 km
μm glass fibre
core

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Table 560: X8/IRIG-B and EIA-485 interface

Type Protocol Cable
Tension clamp IRIG-B Shielded twisted pair cable
connection Recommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (9841-
9844) or Alpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)
Tension clamp IEC 68070–5–103 Shielded twisted pair cable
connection DNP3.0 Recommended: DESCAFLEX RD-
H(ST)H-2x2x0.22mm2, Belden 9729, Belden
9829

Table 561: IRIG-B

Type Value Accuracy
Input impedance 430 Ohm -
Minimum input voltage 4.3 V -
HIGH
Maximum input voltage 0.8 V -
LOW

Table 562: EIA-485 interface

Type Value Conditions
Minimum differential 1.5 V –
driver output voltage
Maximum output 60 mA -
current
Minimum differential 0.2 V -
receiver input voltage
Table continues on next page

604
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 17
Technical data

Type Value Conditions

Supported bit rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400, -
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Maximum number of 32 -
650 IEDs supported on
the same bus
Max. cable length 925 m (3000 ft) Cable: AWG24 or better, stub lines shall be
avoided

Table 563: Serial rear interface

Type Counter connector
Serial port (X9) Optical serial port, type ST for IEC 60870-5-103
and DNP serial

Table 564: Optical serial port (X9)

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1)
820 nm MM 62,5/125 µm ST 6.8 dB (approx. 1700m length with 4 db /
glass fibre core km fibre attenuation)
820 nm MM 50/125 µm ST 2.4 dB (approx. 600m length with 4 db /
glass fibre core km fibre attenuation)

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by fibre

17.8 Enclosure class

17.9 Ingress protection

Table 565: Ingress protection

Description Value
IED front IP 54
IED rear IP 20
IED sides IP 40
IED top IP 40
IED bottom IP 20

605
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Technical data

17.10 Environmental conditions and tests

Table 566: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40...+70ºC (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55ºC
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 86...106 kPa
Altitude up to 2000 m
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC

Table 567: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference
Cold tests operation 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1/ANSI
16 h at -40ºC C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)

storage 96 h at -40ºC
Dry heat tests operation 16 h at +70ºC IEC 60068-2-2/ANSI
C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)

storage 96 h at +85ºC
Damp heat tests steady state 240 h at +40ºC IEC 60068-2-78
humidity 93%

cyclic 6 cycles at +25 to +55ºC IEC 60068-2-30

humidity 93...95%

606
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 18
IED and functionality tests

Section 18 IED and functionality tests

18.1 Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Table 568: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Description Type test value Reference
100 kHz and 1 MHz burst IEC 61000-4-18, level 3
disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
• Common mode 2.5 kV

• Differential mode 2.5 kV

Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2, level 4

IEC 60255-22-2
ANSI C37.90.3-2001
• Contact discharge 8 kV

• Air discharge 15 kV

Radio frequency interference

tests
• Conducted, common 10 V (emf), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3
mode IEC 60255-22-6

• Radiated, amplitude- 20 V/m (rms), f=80...1000 MHz IEC 61000-4-3, level 3

modulated and f=1.4...2.7 GHz IEC 60255-22-3
ANSI C37.90.2-2004
Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4, class A
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
• Communication ports 4 kV

• Other ports 4 kV

Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5

IEC 60255-22-5
• Communication 1 kV line-to-earth

• Other ports 2 kV line-to-earth, 1 kV line-to-

line
• Power supply 4 kV line-to-earth, 2 kV line-to-
line
Power frequency (50 Hz) IEC 61000-4-8, level 5
magnetic field
• 3s 1000 A/m

Table continues on next page

607
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED and functionality tests

Description Type test value Reference

• Continuous 100 A/m

Pulse magnetic field immunity 1000A/m IEC 61000–4–9, level 5

test
Damped oscillatory magnetic 100A/m, 100 kHz and 1MHz IEC 6100–4–10, level 5
field
Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7, class A
IEC 61000-4-16
• Common mode 300 V rms

• Differential mode 150 V rms

Voltage dips and short Dips: IEC 60255-11

interruptionsc on DC power 40%/200 ms IEC 61000-4-11
supply 70%/500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s : Correct behaviour at
power down
Voltage dips and interruptions Dips: IEC 60255–11
on AC power supply 40% 10/12 cycles at 50/60 Hz IEC 61000–4–11
70% 25/30 cycles at 50/60 Hz
Interruptions:
0–50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s: Correct behaviour at
power down
Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
ANSI C63.4, FCC
• Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)

0.15...0.50 MHz < 79 dB(µV) quasi peak

< 66 dB(µV) average
0.5...30 MHz < 73 dB(µV) quasi peak
< 60 dB(µV) average
• Radiated RF-emission,
IEC

30...230 MHz < 40 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 10 m distance
230...1000 MHz < 47 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance

608
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 18
IED and functionality tests

18.2 Insulation tests

Table 569: Insulation tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dielectric tests: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
1 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min,
communication
Impulse voltage test: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses,
waveform 1.2/50 μs, source
energy 0.5 J
1 kV, unipolar impulses,
waveform 1.2/50 μs, source
energy 0.5 J, communication
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5
measurements ANSI C37.90-2005
• Isolation resistance >100 MΏ, 500 V DC

Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255-27

• Resistance <0.1 Ώ (60 s)

18.3 Mechanical tests

Table 570: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement
Vibration response tests IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
(sinusoidal)
Vibration endurance test IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock response test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Shock withstand test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Bump test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

18.4 Product safety

Table 571: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)

609
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
IED and functionality tests

18.5 EMC compliance

Table 572: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standard EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)

610
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

Section 19 Time inverse characteristics

19.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in

different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
connected in series.

I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN

Figure 281: Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 282: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

611
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 283: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset time of the protection
• Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

612
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A1 B1
Feeder

I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132.vsd

IEC05000132 V1 EN

Figure 284: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1
the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker.

At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2
the timer of protection A1 is active.

At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of
delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:

613
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, starts
and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.

19.2 Operation principle

19.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value , a timer, according to the
selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the
three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 75.

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1189 V1 EN (Equation 75)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

614
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1190 V1 EN (Equation 76)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according
to equation 77, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
ææ i öp ö
ò ç çè in > ÷ø - C ÷ × dt ³ A × k
0 è ø
EQUATION1191 V1 EN (Equation 77)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

næ æ i( j ) ö p ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1192 V1 EN (Equation 78)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when

i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 285.

615
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 285: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note that the operating
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 80:

æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø
EQUATION1194 V1 EN (Equation 80)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

616
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive earth faults. The
curve is described by equation 81:

æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø
EQUATION1195 V1 EN (Equation 81)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

The timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level
minus the hysteresis.

19.3 Inverse time characteristics

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it
is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to
zero.

Table 573: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 -

æ ö
A
t=ç + B ÷ × k + tDef
è (
çç I P - 1 ) ÷÷
ø
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185,
P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02

617
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

Table 574: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 -

æ A ö
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

Table 575: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

1
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

618
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

Table 576: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in ±5% +60 ms
steps of 0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k × 480
t =
2.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k × 480
t =
3.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Table 577: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in ±5% +60 ms
steps of 0.01
k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = UVmeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

619
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

Table 578: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5% +70 ms
0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k × 480
t =
2.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k × 480
t =
3.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

620
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 286: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

621
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 287: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

622
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 288: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

623
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 289: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

624
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 290: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

625
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 291: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

626
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 292: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

627
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 293: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

628
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 294: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

629
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 295: IEC Inverse time characteristics

630
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 296: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

631
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 297: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

632
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 298: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

633
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 299: RI-type inverse time characteristics

634
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 300: RD-type inverse time characteristics

635
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 301: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

636
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 302: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

637
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 303: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

638
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 19
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 304: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

639
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 305: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

640
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 20
Glossary

Section 20 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
CB Circuit breaker
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit

641
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Glossary

CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit

642
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 20
Glossary

FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,

data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of
up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical
fibers
FTP File Transfer Protocal
FUN Function type
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 61869-2 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI

643
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Glossary

specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for

the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available
in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces.
The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a
type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MVAL Value of measurement
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection

644
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 20
Glossary

OLTC On-load tap changer

OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than
start/pick-up
OV Over-voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching
when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it
should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital
data in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit

645
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UEN A
Glossary

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with

constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The
de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into
4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for
Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two
protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to
refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite
based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for
further signal processing.
TYP Type identification

646
Technical manual
1MRK 511 287-UEN A Section 20
Glossary

UMT User management tool

Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by
the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to
synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing
for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis tilt
(23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular
rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal
Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the
Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship
navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the military
name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands
for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

647
Technical manual
648
649
Contact us

For more information please contact: Note:

1MRK 511 287-UEN

We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify
the contents of this document without prior notice. ABB AB
ABB AB does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential
Grid Automation Products errors or possible lack of information in this document.
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject
matter and illustrations contained herein. Any reproduction,
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents – in
www.abb.com/protection-control whole or in part – is forbidden without prior written consent of
ABB AB.

© Copyright 2013 ABB.

All rights reserved.

Scan this QR code to visit our website